JP2020168472A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: On the basis of occurrence of a winning to a through winning portion 34, fourth normal symbol side reservation information is acquired, and on the basis of the acquisition of the fourth normal symbol side reservation information, a display continuation round is performed in a fourth normal symbol display portion 134. After the display continuation round is finished, a special winning device 35 becomes an acceptance performance state. In this case, as a display continuation period of the display continuation round, if a first display continuation period is set, even if the special winning device 35 becomes in the acceptance performance state, a winning to the special winning device 35 is basically impossible. As a display continuation period of the display continuation round, if a third display continuation period is set, a winning to the special winning device 35 can occur at a prescribed frequency. In a situation where the display continuation round is being performed in a third normal symbol display portion 133, if the display continuation round of the fourth normal symbol display portion 134 is performed, the third display continuation period is set.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines are configured to give a profit to a player by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special control state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that the pachinko machine shifts to the special control state based on the ball entering the unit. Then, when the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-09055

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 comprises an opportunity ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Information acquisition means for acquiring trigger information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means,
A predetermined profit-giving means for giving a predetermined profit to a player on the condition that the above-mentioned opportunity information is acquired, and
A measuring means that measures a predetermined period based on the acquisition of the trigger information,
The specific profit can be given to the player in the situation where the predetermined period is measured, or the specific profit is more than the situation where the predetermined period is not measured in the situation where the predetermined period is measured. It is characterized in that it is provided with a means for giving a specific profit that makes it easy to be given to.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device and its surroundings in the non-accepted state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device and its surroundings in the accepted state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a) and (b). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a)-(j). It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various areas. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low accuracy / failure table for the first special drawing, (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high accuracy / failure table for the first special figure, and (c) the first. 2 It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability / failure table for a special figure, (d) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high probability / failure table for the second special figure, and (e) a jackpot type table is explained. It is explanatory drawing for this. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the normal map fluctuation period executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the determination of a general drawing executed by the main MPU. (A) to (e) are time charts showing the relationship between the display duration of the general map display unit and the acceptance state of the special winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the normal map fluctuation period executed by the main MPU in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters and various areas. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st general electric power control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd normal power control process which is executed in the main MPU. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a third normal electric power control process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a fourth normal electric control process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th normal figure fluctuation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th normal figure fluctuation period executed in the main MPU. (A) to (f) It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the display continuation period of the 4th ordinary figure display part, and the acceptance state of a special prize apparatus. It is a top view which shows the structure of the disk member in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th normal figure fluctuation period executed by the main MPU in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a third normal electric power control process executed by the main MPU in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 3rd normal figure fluctuation period executed by the main MPU in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th normal figure fluctuation period executed by the main MPU in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st general electric power control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd normal power control process which is executed in the main MPU. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a third normal electric power control process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a fourth normal electric control process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th normal figure fluctuation period executed in the main MPU. (A) to (h) It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the display continuation period of the 4th ordinary figure display part, and the acceptance state of a special prize apparatus. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st general electric power control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd normal power control process which is executed in the main MPU. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a third normal electric power control process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a fourth normal electric control process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th normal figure fluctuation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th normal figure fluctuation period executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) to (j) It is a time chart which shows the state of the jackpot state. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in the twelfth embodiment. (A) to (i) It is a time chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the process of confirming a general drawing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the electric power which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during closing of the electric power which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the telegram notification processing executed in the sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the telegram notification in a symbol display device. (A) to (i) It is a time chart for demonstrating the action by executing a telegram notification on a symbol display device.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area PA is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and the locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. At the same time, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21. The game board 24 is not limited to wood, and may be made of a synthetic resin such as an acrylic plate or a polycarbonate plate.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 65a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is provided with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, there are a general winning unit 31, a first operating unit 32, a second operating unit 33, a through winning unit 34, a special winning device 35, a special electric winning device 36, a variable display unit 37, a special drawing unit 38, and a general drawing unit. 39 etc. are provided respectively. A total of three general winning units 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball is entered into the through winning unit 34, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball is entered into any of the general winning unit 31, the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33, the special winning device 35, and the special electric winning device 36, the number of game media that can be used by the player is determined. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the number. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball is entered into the general winning unit 31, and when a ball is entered into the first operating unit 32, the prize balls are paid out. When three game balls are paid out and one game ball is paid out when the second operating unit 33 is entered, and one game ball is paid out and the special prize device 35 is entered. 11 game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out when the special electric prize winning device 36 is entered.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in the first operating unit 32 and the second operating unit 33 may be the same. Further, the number of prize balls of the special prize device 35 may be less than 11 or more than 11. Further, the number of prize balls of the special prize device 35 is not limited to a configuration smaller than the number of prize balls of the special electric prize device 36, and the number of prize balls of the special prize device 35 and the number of prize balls of the special electric prize device 36 are different. The configuration may be the same, and the number of prize balls in the special winning device 35 may be larger than the number of prize balls in the special electric winning device 36.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and is provided with various members such as a windmill.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning section 31, the first operating section 32, the second operating section 33, the through winning section 34, and the special winning device The entry of a game ball into the 35 and the special electric winning device 36 is also referred to as a winning.

The variable display unit 37 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 37 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA1 which is an region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 37 and the upper region PA1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 37 and above the variable display unit 37. The left region PA2, which is the left region, the right region PA3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 37 that is continuous below the upper region PA1, and the left region PA2 and the right region PA3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided into a lower region PA4 which is a region below the variable display unit 37.

When the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the left region PA2 → the lower region PA4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the upper region PA1 is to the right of the center position in the lateral direction. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3, and the right side area. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum momentum, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4.

The first actuating portion 32 is installed in the lower region PA4. The first operating portion 32 is opened upward, and a member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating portion 32 is not provided. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same manner, the winning probability to the first operating unit 32 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating unit 32 is capable of constantly entering a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the first operating unit 32.

The first operating unit 32 is arranged directly below the stage 37a formed on the variable display unit 37. Further, the variable display unit 37 is provided with a pair of left and right introduction ports 37b, and the variable display unit 37 guides the game ball that has entered the introduction port 37b onto the stage 37a. A guide passage (not shown) is formed. The game ball that has flowed into the stage 37a through the guide passage and is discharged from the lateral center of the stage 37a to the outside of the variable display unit 37 is likely to win a prize in the first operating unit 32. .. The first operating unit 32 is provided with a detection sensor (not shown), and the detection sensor detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first operating unit 32. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 grasps whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first operating unit 32 based on the received signal.

The position where the first operating portion 32 is provided in the lower region PA4 is a position where a game ball flowing down the left region PA2 can enter, and a game ball flowing down the right region PA3 can enter. It is a position. As a result, either when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, or when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Even if there is, it is possible to win a prize in the first operating unit 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the launch operation device 28 is provided so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3 by providing a restricting nail or the like in the middle of the flow region from the right side region PA3 to the first operating portion 32. When is operated, the first operating unit 32 may not be able to win a prize.

The second actuating portion 33 is arranged in the right side region PA3. That is, the second operating unit 33 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated. The second actuating portion 33 is opened upward like the first actuating portion 32, and is not provided with a member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the second actuating portion 33. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same manner, the probability of winning the second operating unit 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the second operating unit 33 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the second operating unit 33. The second operating unit 33 is provided with a detection sensor (not shown), and the detection sensor detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second operating unit 33. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 grasps whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating unit 33 based on the received signal.

In the right side region PA3, on the upstream side of the second operating portion 33, nails 24b are arranged so as to guide the game ball flowing down the upstream region toward the second operating portion 33, and other nails 24b are arranged. There is no ball entry section. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 can easily enter the second operating portion 33. Specifically, the probability of the game ball flowing into the right region PA3 entering the second operating portion 33 is higher than the probability of the game ball flowing into the lower region PA4 entering the first operating portion 32. As described above, the second actuating portion 33 and the peripheral nail 24b are provided. However, not all the game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 enter the second operating unit 33, and the number of game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 is approximately one in a predetermined number (for example, five). The ball is inserted into the two actuating portions 33.

The special winning device 35 is arranged in the left side region PA2. That is, the special winning device 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, and the launch operation device 35 causes the game ball to flow down the left area PA2. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won. The special winning device 35 can be switched between a non-accepted state in which the game ball cannot be entered and an accepted state in which the game ball can be entered.

The configuration of the special winning device 35 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b) in addition to FIG. FIG. 4A is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 35 and its surroundings in the non-accepted state, and FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 35 and its surroundings in the accepted state. Is.

As shown in FIG. 3, the special winning device 35 has a base body 41 in which a discharge passage 42 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 is formed, and a game to the discharge passage 42. An opening / closing member 43 for blocking or allowing the inflow of balls is provided. As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the base body 41 is provided so as to project forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24. In the base body 41, the ball receiving surface 44 that forms the upper surface of the region protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24 extends in the lateral direction, and its lateral dimension is equivalent to two game balls. As mentioned above, in more detail, it is about four game balls.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the inlet portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 is formed on the left side of the ball receiving surface 44 so as to open upward. The entrance portion 42a has an opening area of one game ball or more and less than two game balls, and although one game ball can enter the entrance portion 42a, It is not possible for a plurality of game balls to enter the entrance portion 42a at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage 42 is formed so as to extend vertically downward from the inlet portion 42a, and the passage direction is directed toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the base body 41. It has been changed on the way. The game ball that has entered the entrance portion 42a is guided to the back side of the game board 24 by passing through the discharge passage 42, and is guided downward to the back side of the game board 24. A detection sensor 45 is provided at an intermediate position of the discharge passage 42. The detection sensor 45 detects a game ball that has entered the discharge passage 42, that is, a game ball that has entered the special winning device 35. The detection sensor 45 is electrically connected to the main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 grasps whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the special winning device 35 based on the received signal.

As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, an opening / closing member 43 is provided so as to open / close the inlet portion 42a. The opening / closing member 43 is inserted into a through hole 46 formed so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. By moving the opening / closing member 43 in the front-rear direction along the through hole 46, as shown in FIG. 4A, the opening / closing member 43 faces the entire inlet portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 from above and reaches the inlet portion 42a. The non-accepting position that blocks the entry of the game ball and the entrance portion 42a by retracting from the blocking position to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 so as not to face the entire entrance portion 42a. It is possible to switch between the receiving position and the receiving position where the pachinko ball can be inserted.

An opening / closing drive unit 47 is provided on the back side of the game board 24 to move the opening / closing member 43. The opening / closing drive unit 47 is electrically connected to the main control device 70 described later. When the opening / closing drive unit 47 is in the non-driving state, the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the non-accepting position by the urging force of an urging means such as a spring (not shown), and the opening / closing member 43 is brought into the driving state. Is placed at the receiving position by being displaced against the urging force of the urging means. The state in which the opening / closing member 43 is arranged in the non-accepting position is the non-accepting state of the special winning device 35, and the state in which the opening / closing member 43 is arranged in the receiving position is the receiving state of the special winning device 35.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 43 is inclined downward toward the right. Further, the region to the right of the opening / closing member 43 arranged at the non-reception position on the ball receiving surface 44 is also inclined downward to the right. Further, an upright wall 48 is integrally formed at the left end of the upper portion of the base body 41 by erecting upward from the ball receiving surface 44. The upright wall 48 has a height dimension of one or more game balls, and specifically, a height dimension of about two game balls. With the above configuration, in a situation where the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at a non-accepting position as shown in FIG. 4A, the game ball that has reached above the opening / closing member 43 moves to the left on the upright wall 48. It is guided to the right side of the special winning device 35 by flowing down by its own weight along the inclination of the upper surface of the opening / closing member 43 and the ball receiving surface 44. As shown in FIG. 3, the special winning device 35 is provided so as to be separated from the left end of the variable display unit 37 by one game ball or more to the left, so that the special winning device 35 is provided along the inclination of the upper surface of the opening / closing member 43 and the ball receiving surface 44. The game ball guided to the right of the special winning device 35 flows downward through the space between the special winning device 35 and the variable display unit 37. As a result, the game ball that has reached the special winning device 35 but has not won the special winning device 35 continues to flow down the left side region PA2 and the lower side region PA4 as it is. Then, the game ball that has continued to flow down can enter the first operating unit 32.

A through winning section 34 is provided above the special winning device 35 in the left region PA2. That is, the through winning unit 34 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device 34 causes the game ball to flow down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won. The through winning portion 34 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole, a prize is generated in the through winning portion 34. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 will continue to flow down the game area PA. The through winning unit 34 is provided with a detection sensor (not shown), and the detection sensor detects the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34. The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 grasps whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the through winning unit 34 based on the received signal.

At a position vertically below the through winning portion 34, there are an inlet portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 in the special winning device 35 and an opening / closing member 43 arranged at a non-accepting position. In this case, the through winning portion 34 is provided at a position separated upward from the inlet portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 and the opening / closing member 43 arranged at the non-accepting position, but in the region between them. Is formed with a first guide region 49a for surely guiding the game ball winning the through winning portion 34 to the entrance portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 or the opening / closing member 43 arranged at the non-accepting position. The method of forming the first guide region 49a is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the first guide region 49a is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b and by the upright wall 48 of the special winning device 35. By forming the first guide region 49a, if the opening / closing member 43 is arranged in the non-accepting position, the game ball winning the through winning portion 34 is surely arranged in the non-accepting position. If the opening / closing member 43 reaches the member 43 and the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position, the game ball that has won the through winning portion 34 surely enters the discharge passage 42.

A second guide region 49b is formed on the upstream side of the left region PA2 with respect to the through winning portion 34 to surely guide the game ball flowing into the left region PA2 from the upper region PA1 to the through winning portion 34. The method of forming the second guide region 49b is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the second guide region 49b is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b. Since the second guide region 49b is formed, the game ball that has flowed into the left side region PA2 surely wins the through winning portion 34. Then, as described above, since the first guide region 49a is formed between the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35, the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 is surely arranged in the non-accepting position. It reaches the opening / closing member 43 or the inlet portion 42a of the discharge passage 42.

Based on the winning of the through winning section 34, the opening / closing member 43 of the special winning device 35 moves from the non-accepting position to the receiving position. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through winning unit 34, and a general drawing unit 39 is displayed in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. In part 39a, display continuation times including variable display of the pattern are performed. Then, the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the acceptance execution state, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the display shifts to the acceptance execution state after the display continuation times in the general map display unit 39a are completed. In the acceptance execution state, the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the acceptance position in a predetermined manner. Only one type of this acceptance execution state is prepared, and the number of times the opening / closing member 43 is placed in the acceptance position and the conditions for returning from the acceptance position to the non-acceptance position when the acceptance execution state is reached regardless of the gaming state. Is constant. Specifically, when the acceptance execution state is set, the opening / closing member 43 is arranged only once at the acceptance position, and the special winning device 35 has an upper limit number (specifically, 10) of game balls on the normal electric side. The position of the opening / closing member 43 can be switched from the accepting position to the non-accepting position when one of the conditions of entering the ball and the elapse of the opening duration (specifically, 0.1 seconds) on the normal electric side is satisfied. ..

The normal figure display unit 39a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is not possible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 51 described later on the normal figure display unit 39a, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the normal figure display unit 39a. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the pattern displayed on the general drawing display unit 39a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 39, a normal drawing holding display unit 39b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 39a. Up to four pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls that have won the through winning section 34 are held as holding information on the normal drawing side, and the holding number is displayed by lighting the holding display section 39b of the normal drawing. .. The display range of the normal figure display unit 39a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51, which will be described later. Further, the display range for both the normal figure display unit 39a and the normal figure hold display unit 39b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the symbol display device 51 as compared with the normal figure display unit 39a and the normal figure hold display unit 39b.

A plurality of types of display continuation periods for one display continuation time are set in the normal map display unit 39a. Specifically, three types of a first display continuation period, a second display continuation period, and a third display continuation period are set. When the first display continuation period is selected, it indicates whether or not the acceptance execution state occurs after the display continuation time is completed after the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 39a is performed for 0.05 seconds. The stop result will be confirmed and displayed for 0.4 seconds. If the display is continued times corresponding to the occurrence of the acceptance execution state, the acceptance execution state is set after the confirmation display is completed, and the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the acceptance position. In this case, in the acceptance execution state, the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position only once, and the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the non-accepting position after 0.1 seconds have passed. Then, when a predetermined game ball wins in the through winning section 34 and the first display continuation period is selected in a situation where the holding information on the normal drawing side is not stored, the time when the through winning section 34 is won. The opening / closing member 43 is placed in the receiving position when 0.45 seconds have passed since then, and the opening / closing member 43 is placed in the non-receiving position when 0.55 seconds have passed from the time when the through winning portion 34 is awarded. Be placed. On the other hand, the distance between the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 is the opening / closing member 43 or the discharge passage 42 in which the game ball winning the through winning unit 34 is arranged at a non-accepting position in the special winning device 35. The shortest period required to reach the entrance portion 42a of the above is 0.65 seconds, and the longest period is 0.7 seconds. Therefore, when a predetermined game ball wins a prize in the through winning unit 34 and the first display continuation period is selected in a situation where the holding information on the normal drawing side is not stored, the special winning device 35 is in the open execution state. However, the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position before the predetermined game ball reaches the position where the special winning device 35 can be entered (that is, the position where the opening / closing member 43 is opened / closed), and the opening / closing member 43 is further arranged. Return to the non-accepting position, so that the predetermined game ball does not enter the special winning device 35.

Here, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds when the firing of the game ball is continued. Therefore, when the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the left side region PA2, the game ball basically reaches the position of the through winning unit 34 in a cycle of 0.6 seconds, and similarly, the special winning device The game ball arrives at a position where the ball can enter 35 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds. Then, the game ball launched one before the predetermined game ball enters the special winning device 35 within 0.05 seconds to 0.1 seconds after the predetermined game ball wins the through winning section 34. You will reach a position where it is possible. On the other hand, the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position at the timing when 0.45 seconds have elapsed since the predetermined game ball won the through winning unit 34. Therefore, even if the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position when the predetermined game ball wins the through winning unit 34, the game ball launched one before the predetermined game ball is predetermined. The special winning device 35 in the acceptance execution state triggered by the game ball will not win a prize. From the above, when the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of one pattern on the general drawing display unit 39a, a prize is basically generated in the special prize device 35 even if the acceptance is executed. do not do.

The holding information on the normal map side cannot be newly started when the display continuous times on the normal figure display unit 39a or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, that is, the display continuous times on the normal figure display unit 39a cannot be started. In some cases, when the game ball wins in the through winning unit 34, it is stored on hold. In this case, when the first display continuation period is selected, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, it is possible to start the next display continuation time after the display continuation time in the normal figure display unit 39a is started. The period until the acceptance execution state is 0.45 seconds, and even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation times on the normal figure display unit 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state is 0.55 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, and the game ball basically reaches the position of the through winning portion 34 in a cycle of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, regardless of whether the acceptance execution state does not occur or the acceptance execution state occurs, the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 39a are newly started in the situation where the first display continuation period is selected. Since the game ball does not win the through winning section 34 in a situation where it cannot be made to do so, the holding information on the normal drawing side is not acquired.

When the second display continuation period is selected, a stop result indicating whether or not the acceptance execution state occurs after the display continuation time is completed after the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 39a is performed for 10 seconds. Will be confirmed and displayed for 0.4 seconds. If the display is continued times corresponding to the occurrence of the acceptance execution state, the acceptance execution state is set after the confirmation display is completed, and the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the acceptance position. The execution mode of this acceptance execution state is the same as when the first display duration is selected. Then, if a predetermined game ball wins in the through winning section 34 in a situation where the holding information on the normal drawing side is not stored, 10.4 seconds have passed from the time when the through winning section 34 is won. The opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position, and the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the non-accepting position at a timing when 10.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the through winning portion 34 is won. On the other hand, as described above, the period required for the game ball winning the through winning unit 34 to reach the opening / closing member 43 or the entrance portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 arranged at the non-accepting position in the special winning device 35. Is 0.65 seconds to 0.7 seconds. Therefore, when a predetermined game ball wins a prize in the through winning unit 34 and the second display continuation period is selected in a situation where the holding information on the normal drawing side is not stored, the special winning device 35 is in the open execution state. However, since the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position after the predetermined game ball has passed the position where the special winning device 35 can enter the ball (that is, the position where the opening / closing member 43 is opened / closed), the predetermined game The ball does not enter the special winning device 35. On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball launched after the predetermined game ball reaches the position where the special winning device 35 can be entered is included in the period when the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position. If so, the game ball will enter the special winning device 35.

Further, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds as already explained, and when the game ball is continuously fired so as to flow down the left side region PA2, it is basically at the position of the through winning portion 34. The game ball arrives in a cycle of 0.6 seconds. In this case, when the second display continuation period is selected, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, it is possible to start the next display continuation time after the display continuation time in the normal figure display unit 39a is started. The period until the acceptance execution state is 10.4 seconds, and even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation times on the normal figure display unit 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state is 10.5 seconds. Therefore, regardless of whether the acceptance execution state does not occur or the acceptance execution state occurs, the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 39a are newly started in the situation where the second display continuation period is selected. In a situation where it cannot be done, a game ball will be won in the through winning section 34, and the holding information on the normal drawing side will be acquired. In addition, if the launch of the game balls is continued so as to flow down the left area PA2 in the situation where the second display continuation period is selected, the reference number (specifically, 2) or more is held on the normal side. The information is reserved and stored, and more specifically, the upper limit number (specifically, 4) of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is stored on hold.

When the third display continuation period is selected, it indicates whether or not the acceptance execution state occurs after the display continuation time is completed after the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 39a is performed for 0.6 seconds. The stop result will be confirmed and displayed for 0.4 seconds. If the display is continued times corresponding to the occurrence of the acceptance execution state, the acceptance execution state is set after the confirmation display is completed, and the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the acceptance position. The execution mode of this acceptance execution state is the same as when the first display continuation period is selected and when the second display continuation period is selected. Then, when the third display continuation period is selected, the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position at the timing when one second has elapsed from the start of the display continuation time on the normal drawing display unit 39a, and the display continuation time is started. The opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the non-accepting position at the timing when 1.1 seconds have elapsed from the time. On the other hand, as described above, the period required for the game ball winning the through winning unit 34 to reach the opening / closing member 43 or the entrance portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 arranged at the non-accepting position in the special winning device 35. Is 0.65 seconds to 0.7 seconds. Therefore, when a predetermined game ball wins in the through winning unit 34 and the third display continuation period is selected, even if the special winning device 35 is in the open execution state, the predetermined game ball becomes the special winning device 35. Since the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position after passing through the position where the ball can be entered (that is, the position where the opening / closing member 43 is opened / closed), the predetermined game ball does not enter the special winning device 35. .. On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball launched after the predetermined game ball reaches the position where the special winning device 35 can be entered is included in the period when the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position. If so, the game ball will enter the special winning device 35.

Further, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds as already explained, and when the game ball is continuously fired so as to flow down the left side region PA2, it is basically at the position of the through winning portion 34. The game ball arrives in a cycle of 0.6 seconds. In this case, when the third display continuation period is selected, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, it is possible to start the next display continuation time after the display continuation time in the normal figure display unit 39a is started. Even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation times on the normal figure display unit 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state is 1.1 seconds. Therefore, regardless of whether the acceptance execution state does not occur or the acceptance execution state occurs, in the situation where the third display continuation period is selected, the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 39a are newly started. In a situation where it cannot be done, a game ball will be won in the through winning section 34, and the holding information on the normal drawing side will be acquired. In this case, the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side is basically one.

The third display continuation period is selected when the display continuation period of the display continuation times is determined in a situation where the reference number (specifically, two) or more of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected will occur after the display continuation times due to the second display continuation period have occurred. Further, when the third display continuation period is selected as described above, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, the next display continuation time can be started after the display continuation time in the normal figure display unit 39a is started. The period until the acceptance execution state is 1 second, and even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation times on the normal figure display unit 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state is 1.1 seconds. In this case, the probability of winning the acceptance execution state in the internal lottery corresponding to the occurrence of continuous display times is set to a high probability, specifically 98%. Therefore, when the display continuation times occur, the acceptance execution state generally occurs. In addition, in a situation where the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left side region PA2, one is basically at a position where the special winning device 35 can be entered every 0.6 seconds, which is the firing cycle of the game ball. The game ball arrives at the rate of, but an error of about 0.1 second may occur depending on the flow mode of the game ball. Therefore, when the display continuation times for which the third display continuation period is selected are repeatedly selected, the special winning device 35 is won with a probability of about 1/11. On the other hand, the number of game balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded to the special prize device 35 is 11. Therefore, if the launch of the game ball is continued so as to flow down the left area PA2 in the situation where the display continuation time in which the third display continuation period is selected is repeatedly selected, the player's ball will be held. The increase / decrease is repeated with about 11 pieces, and it is possible to make it possible to hardly increase / decrease the number of balls held by the player during the period in which the display continuation period in which the third display continuation period is selected is repeatedly selected.

When the first display continuation period is selected, if the acceptance execution state does not occur as described above, from the start of the display continuation time in the normal figure display unit 39a until the start of the next display continuation time becomes possible. The period of is 0.45 seconds, and even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation times on the normal figure display unit 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state is 0.55 seconds. Therefore, regardless of whether the acceptance execution state does not occur or the acceptance execution state occurs, the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 39a are newly started in the situation where the first display continuation period is selected. Since the winning of the game ball to the through winning section 34 is basically not generated in the situation where it cannot be made to do so, the holding information on the general drawing side is basically not acquired. However, depending on the flow mode of the game ball, an error of about 0.1 second may occur in the arrival cycle of the game ball to the through winning portion 34. Then, even when the first display continuation period is selected, the holding information on the normal drawing side may be held and stored. However, in this case, the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side that is held and stored is limited to one, and two or more holding information on the normal drawing side are not held and stored. On the other hand, as described above, the reference number of the reserved information on the normal drawing side, which is the criterion for selecting the third display continuation period, is set to two, which is a predetermined plurality. This prevents the situation where the first display duration is selected and suddenly shifts to the situation where the third display duration is selected, and causes a transition to the situation where the third display duration is selected. Therefore, it is possible to configure the configuration in which it is necessary to generate a situation in which the second display duration is selected.

A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33, or the special winning device 35. When a winning lottery is performed, the special figure unit 38 displays a variable pattern of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

About the special figure unit 38 In detail, the special figure unit 38 is provided with a first special figure display unit 38a and a second special figure display unit 38b. In the first special figure display unit 38a, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, so that the pattern is variablely displayed, and finally the lottery result is obtained. The corresponding result is displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display unit 38b, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the second operating unit 33, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and finally the result corresponding to the lottery result. Is displayed. 1 of the game times until the variable display of the pattern is started on either the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b, and the variable display of the pattern is finished after displaying a predetermined result. Corresponds to times.

The first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b are configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b cannot perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 51 described later, but the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38a and the second. It is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the special figure display unit 38b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the pattern displayed on the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters Is displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 38, the first special figure holding display unit 38c is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display unit 38a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 38c. On the other hand, the special figure holding display unit corresponding to the second special figure display unit 38b is not provided. Unlike the first operating unit 32, the number of game balls winning in the second operating unit 33 is not stored on hold. That is, if a prize is generated in the second operating unit 33 in a situation where the game times can be started, the game times in the second special figure display unit 38b are executed, but the game times can be started. Even if a prize is won in the second operating unit 33 in a situation where it cannot be done, the hold information that triggers the start of the game round is not stored. However, even if a prize is awarded to the second operating unit 33 in a situation where the game round cannot be started, the game ball is paid out for that prize.

The display range of the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51 described later. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 38a, the second special figure display unit 38b, and the first special figure reservation display unit 38c is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 51 more than the first special figure display unit 38a, the second special figure display unit 38b, and the first special figure reservation display unit 38c.

When the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b performs variable display of the pattern, that is, when the game round is executed, the symbol display device 51 provided in the variable display unit 37 accordingly. Display production is performed. Further, in the symbol display device 51, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33 or the special winning device 35, but also the opening / closing execution mode that shifts to after a big hit result is obtained. The display effect inside is performed. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

The contents of the display effect performed by the symbol display device 51 during the execution of the game round will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 51 when the game round is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas on the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. That is, when the game round is executed, the variable display of the symbol is performed by using the entire display surface of the symbol display device 51.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main symbol and the sub symbol that are variablely displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As shown in FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern consists of nine kinds of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5 (b), in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is placed between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. In the symbol display device 51, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, the symbol display device 51 is set with five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. There is.

When the symbol display device 51 performs variable display of symbols based on winning a prize in the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33, or the special winning device 35, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have periodicity. The variable display is started so as to scroll in a predetermined direction. Then, basically, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It ends with. In addition, when the variable display of symbols ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a high-accuracy jackpot result described later, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is formed on one of the effective lines, and the result of the internal lottery is obtained. If the result is a low probability jackpot, which will be described later, the same combination of even symbols is formed on one of the effective lines, and if the result of the internal lottery is a small hit result, which will be described later, one of the valid lines. A predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3.4.1") that is neither a combination of the same symbols nor a combination of reach symbols is formed on the top.

As described above, in the configuration in which the symbol variation is displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the expected effect is set as the display effect of the symbol display device 51 when the game round is executed. The expected effect is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which a jackpot result is likely to occur at a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 is started. Say. There are two types of expected effects, a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the jackpot result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the same type of symbols for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the remaining middle symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which the symbol is variablely displayed in column Z2 is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform a reach effect. If it is a game time that results in a big hit, a symbol of the same type as the symbol forming the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, and if it is a game time that does not result in a big hit, the reach symbol A symbol of a type different from the symbol forming the combination of is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols are variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z1. In the situation where the symbols are variablely displayed in the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in Z3, the mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

When a big hit result or a small hit result is selected in the internal lottery executed based on the winning of the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33 or the special winning device 35, the game corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result. After the end of the round, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode, the special electric winning device 36 can be won. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 36 is provided at a position below the second operating portion 33 in the right region PA3. That is, the special electric winning device 36 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device 36 causes the game ball to flow down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the large winning opening 36a. It is provided with a special electric side opening / closing member 36b that switches between the open state and the open state through which the game ball can pass. The special electric side opening / closing member 36b is opened by being driven by a drive unit 36c for special electric power through a link mechanism (not shown). The special electric winning device 36 is provided with a game ball passage so that the large winning opening 36a serves as an entrance portion, and the game ball flowing into the game ball passage through the large winning opening 36a is detected by a detection sensor (not shown). The detection sensor is electrically connected to the main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 grasps whether or not the game ball has won the special electric winning device 36 based on the received signal.

The open / close execution mode includes a first open / close execution mode that is triggered by a big hit result and a second open / close execution mode that is triggered by a small hit result. The frequency of occurrence of winning the special electric winning device 36 differs between the first opening / closing execution mode and the second opening / closing execution mode from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. Specifically, in the first opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined number of times (specifically, 16 times) of round games are executed. The round game continues until either the condition that the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 36 is the upper limit and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 36 is satisfied. It is a game. In the pachinko machine 10, the special electric winning device 36 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the opening duration in each round game is set to 29 seconds. In addition, the maximum number of winnings to the special electric winning device 36 in each round game is set to 10. In a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds, so that a round game is played. The open duration of is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that a maximum number of game balls or more will be won in the special electric winning device 36.

On the other hand, in the second opening / closing execution mode, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening / closing of the special electric winning device 36 is the upper limit, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 36. It is terminated when one of the conditions is met. The number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 36 in the second opening / closing execution mode is set to 3 times with a predetermined interval period (for example, 1 second) in between, and the opening continuation period in each opening time is set to 1 second. Further, the upper limit number in the second opening / closing execution mode is set to 10. In a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. The total opening duration of the special electric winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of the second opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, it cannot be expected that the maximum number of game balls will be won in the special electric winning device 36 in the second opening / closing execution mode. However, one or two game balls can be expected to be won at each opening time of the special electric winning device 36 in the second opening / closing execution mode, and 15 game balls are expected to be won when the special electric winning device 36 is won. Since the payout is executed, the player can increase the number of balls held by the second opening / closing execution mode.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the game board 24 having the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 61, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 65a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 66a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 65a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 85, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 66a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 65a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 70a. The substrate box 70a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 70a are inseparably bonded to each other, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is formed, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is conceivable that an adhesive is applied to the boundary between the plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 70a.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 70. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 81 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 82 and the control device collecting unit 83 are attached to the back pack 81.

The payout mechanism unit 82 includes a tank 84 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 85 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 84. The game ball paid out from the payout device 85 is discharged to the upper plate 65a or the lower plate 66a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 85. The payout mechanism unit 82 is mounted with a back pack substrate having, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply and a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device collective unit 83 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 86 having a function of controlling the payout device 85 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 87 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 86 and the power supply / launch control device 87 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 86 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A certain RAM 74, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 70.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 75 provided in the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72, and a payout control device 86 is also connected to the input side. A power supply / emission control device 87 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 75, and power is supplied to the MPU 72 via the power failure monitoring board 75.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 32a, 33a, 34a, 36d, 45 (hereinafter, various prize detection sensors 32a to 45) are connected to the input side of the MPU 72. The various prize detection sensors 32a to 45 include a detection sensor 32a provided in the first operating unit 32, a detection sensor 33a provided in the second operating unit 33, a detection sensor 34a provided in the through winning unit 34, and a special prize. The detection sensor 45 provided in the device 35 and the detection sensor 36d provided in the special electric winning device 36 are included. In addition to that, a detection sensor provided in the general winning unit 31 is included. Based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 32a to 45, the MPU 72 determines the winning of each winning ball portion. Further, in the MPU 72, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33 and the special winning device 35, and another lottery is executed based on the winning of the through winning unit 34. ..

A power failure monitoring board 75, a payout control device 86, and a voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 86, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. When the payout control device 86 receives the prize ball command, the payout control device 86 drives and controls the payout device 85 so that the number of game balls specified by the prize ball command is paid out. The voice emission control device 90 is mounted on the back surface of the symbol display device 51 together with the display control device 100 described later. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 90.

On the output side of the MPU 72, there is a special electric drive unit 36c that opens and closes the special electric side opening / closing member 36b of the special electric winning device 36, an opening / closing drive unit 47 that opens / closes the opening / closing member 43 of the special winning device 35, a special drawing unit 38, and The normal drawing unit 39 is connected. By the way, the special figure unit 38 is provided with the first special figure display unit 38a, the second special figure display unit 38b, and the first special figure reservation display unit 38c, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. Has been done. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 39 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 39a and a normal drawing holding display unit 39b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 71, and the MPU 72 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, when the special winning device 35 is won in the acceptance execution state, the MPU 72 outputs a drive signal to the open / close drive unit 47 so that the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance state, and the condition for returning to the non-acceptance state is satisfied. When is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the special winning device 35 is returned to the non-accepted state. Further, when the opening start condition of the special electric winning device 36 is satisfied in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 72 sends a drive signal to the special electric driving unit 36c so that the special electric winning device 36 is in an open state in which the game ball can be won. When the output is performed and the closing condition of the special electric winning device 36 is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped to put the special electric winning device 36 in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won. Further, in each game rotation and opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the special figure unit 38 is executed in the MPU 72. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not the special winning device 35 is set to the acceptance execution state is clearly indicated, the display control of the normal drawing unit 39 is executed in the MPU 72.

The power failure monitoring board 75 relays between the main control board 71 and the power supply / emission control device 87, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 87. The payout control device 86 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 85 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70.

The power supply / launch control device 87 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 71, the payout control device 86, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 87 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 74 of the control device 70 and the payout control device 86. Further, the power supply / launch control device 87 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91 on which the MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A certain RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. The MPU 92 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 based on the command received from the main control device 70, and transmits the command to the display control device 100.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 on which the MPU 102 is mounted. The MPU 102 is a ROM 103 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 103 is executed. A RAM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. The MPU 102 executes the display control of the symbol display device 51 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

Although not shown, the display control board 101 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 102. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as a main MPU 72, a main ROM 73 and a main RAM 74, and the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 is referred to as a sound light side MPU 92.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 72>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main MPU 72 uses various counter information during the game to draw a winning lottery, set the display of the first special figure display unit 38a, set the display of the second special figure display unit 38b, and produce a game rotation effect of the symbol display device 51. The setting, the display setting of the general figure display unit 39a, etc. are performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of a hit and the hit type are determined. The type counter C2 to be used, the reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery to generate the reach when it fluctuates in the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 51, and the random number initial value counter used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The CINI and the variable type counter CS used when determining the duration of the game round are used. Further, the general electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the special winning device 35 is set to the acceptance execution state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 111 of the main RAM 74.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which "1" is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The counters C1 to C3 and CINI, CS, and C4 are updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used for the first special figure provided in the main RAM 74 when a prize is generated in the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35. It is stored in the area 112. Further, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special drawing provided in the main RAM 74 when a prize is generated in the second operating unit 33. ..

The first special drawing area 112 includes a first area 113a, a second area 113b, a third area 113c, and a fourth area 113d, in accordance with the winning history of the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35. , Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 113a to 113d as the reserved information on the first special figure side. In this case, in the first area 113a to the fourth area 113d, when the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 113a → the second area 113b → the first Each numerical information is stored in the order of 3 area 113c → 4th area 113d in chronological order. By providing the four areas 113a to 113d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored on hold in the first special drawing area 112 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular. The first special drawing area 112 is provided with an execution area 114 for the first special drawing in addition to the first area 113a to the fourth area 113d. In the execution area 114 for the first special figure, when the first special figure display unit 38a starts the variable display of the pattern, the pending information of the object for which the hit / fail judgment for the special figure, the type judgment, etc. is performed is stored. It is an area. The hold information stored in the first area 113a is shifted to the execution area 114 for the first special figure when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 38a is started.

In the execution area 115 for the second special figure, each of the random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 hits when a prize is generated in the second operating unit 33 in a situation where the game round can be started. Numerical information is stored as reserved information on the second special drawing side. Here, as described above, the first special drawing area 112 is provided with the first to fourth areas 113a to 113d, and even if it is impossible to start the game round, the first special drawing side In contrast to the configuration in which the hold information of is stored on hold, only the execution area 115 for the second special figure is provided for the hold information on the second special figure side, and the hold information on the second special figure side is provided. There is no area for holding and storing. As a result, it is possible to handle the presence / absence of the hold storage differently between the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side.

The information corresponding to the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 116 provided in the main RAM 74 when a prize is generated in the through winning unit 34. The normal figure holding area 116 includes a first area 117a, a second area 117b, a third area 117c, and a fourth area 117d, and a numerical value of the normal electric random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through winning unit 34. The information is stored in any of the areas 117a to 117d as the reserved information on the normal drawing side. In this case, in the first area 117a to the fourth area 117d, when the through winning unit 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 117a → the second area 117b → the third area 117c → the fourth. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of area 117d. By providing the four areas 117a to 117d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through winning unit 34 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the holding area 116 is not limited to four, and may be any number of items, such as two, three, or five or more. It may be. An execution area 118 for a normal map is provided in the normal map reservation area 116. The execution area 118 for the normal map is an area in which the hold information of the target for which the pass / fail judgment for guidance is to be performed is stored when the variable display is started on the normal map display unit 39a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 39a is started, the normal map side hold information stored in the first area 117a of the normal map hold area 116 is shifted to the execution area 118 for the normal map. To.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 99" and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The normal electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the general electric random number counter C4 at that time is stored in the normal figure holding area 116 at the timing when the game ball wins the through winning unit 34. Then, at a predetermined timing, acceptance determination is performed as to whether or not the special winning device 35 is controlled to the acceptance execution state by the value of the stored general electric random number counter C4.

Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 399" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the value of the winning random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the first special drawing area 112 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35. When the game ball wins the second operating unit 33 in a situation where the game round can be started, the value of the hit random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure. Then, the winning / failing determination is performed using the value of the stored hit random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination is stored in the main ROM 73 as a winning / failing table. The pass / fail table is provided corresponding to the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as lottery modes in the winning / failing lottery means, and a winning / failing table is stored corresponding to each mode. That is, the hit / fail table includes a low probability hit / fail table for the first special figure, a high probability hit / fail table for the first special figure, a low probability hit / fail table for the second special figure, and a high accuracy table for the second special figure. There are four types, a win / fail table. These pass / fail tables will be described. FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the low accuracy table for the first special figure, and FIG. 9B is for explaining the contents of the high accuracy table for the first special figure. 9 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the low accuracy table for the second special figure, and FIG. 9 (d) is the high accuracy table for the second special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of.

As shown in FIG. 9 (a), two values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in the low probability / failure table for the first special figure, and the values of the other hit random number counters C1 are out of order. Corresponds to the result. When the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail judgment process, the first open / close execution mode already described is executed after the game times corresponding to the hit / fail judgment process are completed, and the missed result is selected in the hit / fail judgment process. If this is done, the open / close execution mode does not occur. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, 150 values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in the high accuracy / non-permissibility table for the first special figure, and the values of the other hit random number counters C1. Corresponds to the off result. As a result, the jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side.

As shown in FIG. 9 (c), two values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in the low probability / failure table for the second special figure as in the low probability / failure table for the first special figure. As shown in FIG. 9D, the value of the hit random number counter C1 which is the big hit result is set to 150 in the high accuracy table for the second special figure as in the high accuracy table for the first special figure. Has been done. That is, the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode is the same for the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side, and the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is also the first special figure. The hold information on the side and the hold information on the second special figure side are the same.

In both the low accuracy table for the second special figure and the high accuracy table for the second special figure, a small hit result is set in addition to the big hit result, and the value of the hit random number counter C1 that is the small hit result. The number is 240, which is common to the low accuracy table for the second special drawing and the high accuracy table for the second special drawing. That is, the probability of a big hit result differs between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, whereas the probability of a small hit result is common to the low probability mode and the high probability mode. When the small hit result is selected in the hit / fail determination process, the second open / close execution mode already described is executed after the game times corresponding to the hit / fail determination process are completed. Further, in the low accuracy table for the second special figure and the high accuracy table for the second special figure, the value of the hit random number counter C1 corresponding to neither the big hit result nor the small hit result is associated with the outlier result. Has been done.

When the hold information on the first special figure side is the target of the hit / fail judgment process due to the setting of the hit / miss table as described above, either the jackpot result or the miss result is selected. When the hold information on the second special figure side is the target of the hit / fail judgment process, not only the big hit result and the miss result but also the small hit result is selected. In this case, the probability that the small hit result will be selected when the hold information on the second special figure side is the target of the hit / fail judgment process is selected in either the low probability mode or the high probability mode. Higher than the probability of being done. The probability that this small hit result is selected is more than 1/2 in detail. As a result, the game ball is launched with the aim of winning the second operating unit 33, so that a small hit result is generated with a high probability.

If the reserved information on the second special drawing side is the target of the hit / fail determination process and does not result in a big hit result, the small hit result may be reliably or almost certainly selected. Further, the small hit result may be selected even when the reserved information on the first special drawing side is the target of the hit / fail determination process.

The type counter C2 is configured to add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 29" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, the value of the type counter C2 at that time is stored in the first special drawing area 112, and the game times. The value of the type counter C2 at that time is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating unit 33 in the situation where it is possible to start. Then, the type of the jackpot result is determined by using the value of the stored type counter C2.

FIG. 9E is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot type table used when determining the type of the jackpot result for the type counter C2. In the jackpot type table, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 19" corresponds to the low accuracy jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to the high accuracy jackpot result. There is. Both the low-accuracy jackpot result and the high-accuracy jackpot result trigger the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode. In addition, when a low probability jackpot result is obtained, the low probability mode is set after the end of the first open / close execution mode and before the start of the first open / close execution mode regardless of the type of the winning / failing lottery mode, and the high probability jackpot result is obtained. In the case of, the high probability mode is set after the end of the first open / close execution mode, regardless of the type of the winning / failing lottery mode before the start of the first opening / closing execution mode.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 at that time is stored in the first special figure area 112 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35. When the game ball wins the second operating unit 33 in a situation where the game round can be started, the value of the reach random number counter C3 at that time is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure. When the game times corresponding to the deviation result are executed, whether or not the reach display is executed is determined by using the values of these stored reach random number counters C3.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 198" and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variable type counter CS is used to determine the duration of the game times on the main MPU 72.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 72>
Next, various processes executed for advancing the game on the main MPU 72 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 72 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. After that, the access of the main RAM 74 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 72 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase button provided in the power / emission control device 87 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 74. (Step S105). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum is executed (step S106), and whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). Step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and retained by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 74 is cleared as the initialization of the main RAM 74. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase button is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 74, such as initialization of the power failure flag, is set as an initial value. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 86 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 86.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, the main MPU 72 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, but the remaining time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, and the residual processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S110). Further, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (step S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 74, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set (step S113). After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started in a cycle of 4 msec.

First, the power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 75, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and the read numerical information is added by 1 to each of them, and then read. Executes the process of overwriting the original counter. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111 (step S203), and the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112 (step S204). After that, the game stop determination process is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. After that, the processes after step S207 are executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO).

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt processing, the output corresponding to the output information is executed.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, the winning detection process is executed (step S209). In the prize detection process, signals received from various prize detection sensors 32a to 45 are read, and the general prize unit 31, the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33, the through winning unit 34, the special winning device 35, and A process for specifying whether or not a special electric winning device 36 has been won is executed.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S211). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop setting is made in the above step S205 in the next timer interrupt process. Affirmative determination is made in step S206.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S212). In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined firing cycle, as described above.

After that, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 32a to 45 and the opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208 (step). S213).

After that, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times on the first special figure display unit 38a, the execution control of the game times on the second special figure display unit 38b, and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed ( Step S214). In addition, the execution control of the display continuation times in the general map display unit 39a and the execution control of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 are executed (step S215).

After that, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 to S215, the output information is set to reflect the increase / decrease number of the reserved information on the first special figure side in the first special figure hold display unit 38c, and the normal drawing side. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information in the normal figure hold display unit 39b is set (step S216). Further, in order to set output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 38a and to update the display contents of the second special figure display unit 38b based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 to S215. The output information of the above is set, and the output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 39a is set (step S216).

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 86 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S217). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S218). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S219). If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processes of steps S207 to S219 are executed, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, the hold information acquisition process is first executed (step S301). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information. When a prize has been generated for the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 (step S401: YES), the first stored in the first area 113a to the fourth area 113d of the first special drawing area 112. The storage process in the first special drawing area 112 is executed on condition that the number of reserved information on the special drawing side is less than four, which is the upper limit (step S402: NO) (step S403). In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the reserved information on the first special drawing side, and the first area 113a to the fourth area 113d of the first special drawing area 113 are used. Of the areas where the reserved information on the special figure side in is not stored, it is stored in the area on the side where the digestion order is earlier. When the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 38c is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information on the first special figure side this time. Set the data to do so. Further, when the hold information on the first special drawing side is acquired, the hold increase command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92. As a result, the image for notifying the number of reserved information on the first special symbol side in the symbol display device 51 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the reserved information on the first special symbol side.

When a negative determination is made in step S401, an affirmative determination is made in step S402, or the process of step S403 is executed, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the second operating unit 33 (step). S404). When an affirmative judgment is made in step S404, the execution area 115 for the second special figure is reached on condition that neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed (step S405: YES). Is executed (step S406). In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure as the reserved information on the second special figure side. That is, the hold information on the second special figure side is executed by any of the game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, and the open / close execution mode. Obtained only in situations where it has not been. Then, as will be described in detail later, regarding the execution of the pass / fail determination process, in other words, regarding the execution of the game round, the hold information on the second special figure side has priority over the hold information on the first special figure side as an execution trigger. When the hold information on the second special figure side is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure, the hit / fail determination process triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is immediately executed, and the second special figure side 2 The game round is started with the hold information on the special figure side as an opportunity. The second special figure hold display unit for notifying the number of stored hold information on the second special figure side is not provided, and the symbol display device 51 further displays the hold information on the second special figure side. The image for notifying the number of reserved memories is not displayed.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S301, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read out (step S302). In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set. The special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the special figure special electric control process by the main MPU 72.

The special figure special electric counter can take values of "0" to "6", and each value of "0" to "6" corresponds to the start addresses SA0 to SA6 of each process (steps S305 to S311). ing. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, is executed, and the special figure special electric power is executed. When the value of the counter is "1", the special figure changing process (step S306), which is a process for advancing the effect for the game round, is the execution target, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2". In some cases, the special figure determination process (step S307), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is the execution target, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the open / close execution mode is set. The special electric power start process (step S308), which is a process for controlling the opening, is the execution target, and when the value of the special electric power counter is "4", the special electric power winning device 36 is for controlling the open state. The special electric power opening process (step S309), which is a process, is the execution target, and when the value of the special electric power counter is "5", the special electric power closing is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 36. When the intermediate process (step S310) is the execution target and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "6", it is a process for controlling the ending of the open / close execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (step S311) is the execution target.

In the special figure special electric control process, after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S302), the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S303), and the acquired is obtained. Jump to the process indicated by the start address (step S304). Hereinafter, each process of steps S305 to S311 will be described individually.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side is stored (step S501: YES) (step S502). .. In the data setting process, when the hold information on the second special figure side is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure, the hold information on the second special figure side is preceded by the hold information on the first special figure area 112. Regardless of whether or not the reserved information on the first special figure side acquired in is acquired, the reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure is set as the execution target. To do. As a result, the hold information on the second special figure side can be prioritized over the hold information on the first special figure side as an execution trigger of the hit / miss determination process, and can be prioritized as an execution trigger of the game round. Become. The hold information on the second special figure side stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure is deleted when the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is completed.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, when the reserved information on the second special drawing side is not stored in the execution area 115 for the second special drawing, the data stored in the first area 113a of the first special drawing area 112 is stored. Move to the execution area 114 for the first special drawing. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure area 112 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 113a to 113d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 113a and the second area 113b →. The data in each area is shifted such as the first area 113a, the third area 113c → the second area 113b, the fourth area 113d → the third area 113c. Further, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the first special figure reservation display unit 38c are updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the first special figure side this time. Further, in the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 92. As a result, the image for notifying the number of reserved information on the first special symbol side in the symbol display device 51 is updated in correspondence with the decrease in the reserved information on the special symbol side.

After executing the data setting process, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S503). In the hit / fail judgment process, the hit / miss table corresponding to the combination of the type of reserved information selected as the execution target of the hit / fail judgment process in the data setting process and the current win / loss lottery mode (FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (d)) Is read from the main ROM 73. Then, the numerical information about the hit random number counter C1 in the hold information that is the execution target of the current pass / fail determination process is collated with the read pass / fail table.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot result (step S504: YES), the type determination process at the time of the jackpot is executed (step S505). In the jackpot type determination process, the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 9E is read from the main ROM 73. Further, when the hold information on the first special figure side is the trigger of the game round this time, the numerical information about the type counter C2 stored in the execution area 114 for the first special figure is read out, and the second special figure When the hold information on the side is the trigger of the game round this time, the numerical information about the type counter C2 stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure is read out. Then, it is determined which type of the low-accuracy jackpot result and the high-accuracy jackpot result set in the jackpot type table corresponds to the numerical range of the jackpot result that the numerical information about the read type counter C2 corresponds to. To do.

After executing the type determination process at the time of jackpot, "1" is set in the flag of the main RAM 74 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the type determination process (step S506). Specifically, if it corresponds to the low accuracy jackpot result, set "1" to the low accuracy jackpot flag, and if it corresponds to the high accuracy jackpot result, set "1" to the high accuracy jackpot flag. set. The state in which "1" is set in either of the low-accuracy jackpot flag and the high-accuracy jackpot flag is cleared to "0" when the game state transition process is executed when the open / close execution mode ends.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the side of the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b that is the execution target of the game round in the current game round. Is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 73, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 74. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b is set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S507, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S505 is stored in the main RAM 74. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least a part of the jackpot results. The method of selecting the stop result for the jackpot result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of symbols are set is arbitrary, but for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is not a big hit result (step S504: NO), it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination process is a small hit result (step S508). In the pachinko machine 10, when the hold information on the first special figure side is the target of the hit / fail determination process as described above, the small hit result is not selected, and the hold information on the second special figure side is right / wrong. A small hit result can be selected when it is the target of the determination process. When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a small hit result (step S508: YES), "1" is set in the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S509). Then, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S510). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the small hit result to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 38b in the current game is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. The information on the stop mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. It should be noted that one type of stop mode may be set for the small hit result, or a plurality of types of stop modes for the small hit result may be set.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S504 and step S508: NO), the stop result setting process for the miss result is executed (step S511). Specifically, of the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b, the side of the second special figure display unit 38b that is the target of the game round is finally stopped and displayed in the current game round. The information on the stop mode is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result.

After executing any of the stop result setting processes, a process for specifying the duration of the game is executed (step S512). In the specific process, if the hold information that triggered the start of the current game round is the hold information on the first special figure side, it is first determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. .. Specifically, if the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach effect will occur. Further, even if the current game round does not correspond to the jackpot result, the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information on the first special figure side, which is the start target of the current game round, is reached. If the numerical information corresponds to, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. When it is determined that the reach effect is generated, the variation display period table for reach generation is read from the main ROM 73, and the variation display is performed by collating the current numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the read variation display period table. The period is determined, and the information of the determined fluctuation display period is set in the timer counter provided in the main RAM 74. When it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, the variation display period table for non-reach generation is read from the main ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the variation type counter CS and the current status are obtained for the read variation display period table. The variable display period is determined by collating the combination of the number of reserved information on the first special figure side, and the information on the determined variable display period is set in the timer counter provided in the main RAM 74. When the variation display period table for reach generation is referred to, the variation display period corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is selected regardless of the number of reserved information on the first special figure side, whereas the reach is not reached. When the fluctuation period table for generation is referred to, the shorter fluctuation display period is selected as the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side increases. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Incidentally, the variable display period that can be selected when the hold information on the first special drawing side triggers the start of the game round is 1 second to 180 seconds.

In the process of specifying the duration of the game round, if the hold information that triggered the start of the game round is the hold information on the second special figure side, the current winning / losing lottery mode is first of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Determine which is the case. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, as in the case of the hold information on the first special drawing side, the variation display period for reaching generation depends on whether or not the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of reach production. Select either the table or the non-reach variable display period table. If a reach effect occurs, the variation display period is determined by collating the current numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the variation display period table for reach generation, and the information of the determined variation display period is used as the main side. It is set in the timer counter provided in the RAM 74. If the reach effect does not occur, the variable display period is determined by collating the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS with the variable display period table for non-reach generation, and the information of the determined variable display period is mainly used. It is set in the timer counter provided in the side RAM 74. By the way, in the high probability mode, the variable display period that can be selected when the hold information on the second special figure side triggers the start of the game round is 1 second to 60 seconds. In this case, the longest variable display period that can be selected is shorter than the longest variable display period that can be selected when the hold information on the first special figure side is a trigger, and the average variable display period is also the first. 1 It is shorter than the average fluctuation display period that can be selected when the reserved information on the special map side is a trigger.

On the other hand, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the value and fluctuation of the reach random number counter C3 are further irrespective of whether the game result of this game is a big hit result, a small hit result, or a missed result. A variation display period of 1200 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the type counter CS. This fluctuation display period is longer than the longest fluctuation display period that can be selected when the hold information on the first special figure side is a trigger, and further, the hold information on the second special figure side is a trigger in the high probability mode. Longer than the longest variable display period that can be selected if In this way, by extremely lengthening the variable display period of the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side in the low probability mode, the game ball can enter the second operating unit 33 in the low probability mode. When the game is aimed at, it is possible to extremely deteriorate the digestion efficiency of the game times. As described above, the second operating portion 33 is not provided with an opening / closing member for blocking the entry of the game ball. On the other hand, when the reserved information on the second special figure side is the target of the hit / fail judgment process, not only the big hit result can be selected, but also the small hit result is selected with a high probability, and the small hit result is selected. In that case, the second open / close execution mode is generated, and the number of balls held by the player increases based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric winning device 36. In this case, in the low-probability mode, as described above, when the game is performed with the aim of entering the game ball into the second operating unit 33, the digestion efficiency of the game times is extremely deteriorated, so that the low-probability mode is used. Instead of aiming for the game ball to enter the second operating unit 33, aim for the game ball to enter the first operating unit 32, and the high-probability jackpot result is triggered by the hold information on the first special drawing side. After the high probability mode is set, it is possible to perform a game of aiming for the game ball to enter the second operating unit 33.

In addition, as a method for discouraging the player from aiming for the game ball to enter the second operating unit 33 in the low probability mode, in addition to or in place of the above-mentioned variable display period selection configuration, for example, a low probability In the mode, when the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3, the corresponding notification may be performed. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second operating unit 33 in the low probability mode, at least one of the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 is used to determine the right side region. A notification is made so that the player can recognize that the firing of the game ball toward the PA3 is stopped. Even with this configuration, it is possible to discourage the player from aiming for the game ball to enter the second operating unit 33 in the low probability mode.

By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variation display of the pattern on the first special symbol display unit 38a or the second special symbol display unit 38b and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 51 are performed, and each of these variation displays is performed. When it is terminated, the state in which the stop result of the game round is displayed is displayed as the final stop over the final stop period. In this case, the information of the variable display period read out in step S512 is the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the game times. In other words, the duration of the game is the sum of the variable display period and the final suspension period.

After that, the result of the hit / fail determination process and the type determination process of this time, and the variation command and the type command corresponding to the process result of step S512 are selected from the main ROM 73 (step S513). Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 92 (step S514). The sound / light side MPU 92 executes control so that the effect for game rotation corresponding to the received variation command and type command is executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. ..

After that, the variation display of the pattern on the side of the first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38b that is the target of the current game round is started (step S515). The first special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit 38a and the second special figure display unit are used as tables to be referred to by the main MPU 72 when the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b is used to display the variation of the pattern. A variable display table for special figures, which is common to 38b, is stored in advance in the main ROM 73. When the variation display of the pattern is executed on the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the type determination process. To. When the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b performs variable display of the pattern, the variable display of the pattern according to a predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the special figure shows. Control data for one lap in the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is set. Therefore, when the first special figure display unit 38a or the second special figure display unit 38b performs the variable display of the pattern, the variable display table for the special figure is displayed until the duration of the game times determined in step S512 elapses. It will be used repeatedly.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S516). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is increased by 1 to correspond to the special figure fluctuation processing (step S306). 1 ”.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step S306 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

In the special figure change processing, it is determined whether or not the timing is before the final stop display during the game rotation, and if it is before the final stop display, the special figure display units 38a and 38b that are the control targets this time. A process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern in the above is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. In addition, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not a reach display occurs.

When it is time to display the final stop, the symbol display device 51 sends a final stop command to the sound / light side MPU 92 and controls this time in order to display the stop result of the current game round as the final stop. The display mode of the pattern on the special figure display units 38a and 38b is the display mode corresponding to the game result of the current game. Further, the information of the final stop period (0.5 sec) of the game round is read from the main ROM 73 and set in the timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process (step S307).

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the process during special figure determination in step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

In the special figure finalization process, if the final stop period of the current game round has not passed, the special figure finalization process is terminated as it is, and if the final stop period of the current game round has passed, If the result of the hit / fail judgment that triggered the game round is out of the question, after clearing the value of the special figure special electric counter to "0", the processing during confirmation of this special figure is terminated, and the trigger of this game round is used. If the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit result or a small hit result, the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed.

In the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode, the information of the opening period (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and the information of the opening time is set in the timer counter. By the way, the opening period is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. In addition, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92. The opening command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 92 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various big hit results and small hit results is the game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the sound / light side MPU 92 can execute the effect of the open / close execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. Further, by adding 1 to the special electric power counter, the value of the counter is updated to correspond to the special electric power start processing (step S308).

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing in step S308 in the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

In the special electric power start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening period in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed, and if it has passed, the current opening / closing execution mode should be the first opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result. For example, "16" is set as information on the number of round games in the round counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 as the information on the upper limit number, and information corresponding to 29 seconds is set in the timer counter as the information on the open duration. On the other hand, if the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, "3" is set as the information on the opening / closing number of the special electric winning device 36 in the opening / closing number counter provided in the main RAM 74. .. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 as the information of the upper limit number, and information corresponding to 1 second is set in the timer counter as the information of the opening duration. After making these various settings, the special electric winning device 36 is opened. In addition, a release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92. Upon receiving the release command, the sound / light side MPU 92 executes control for switching the effect in the open / close execution mode accordingly. After the special electric power winning device 36 is opened, the special electric power counter is added by 1 to update the value of the counter to the one corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (step S309).

<Processing while the special electric power is open>
Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step S309 in the special power control processing (FIG. 12) will be described.

In the processing during opening of the special electric power, it is determined whether or not the end condition of one round game is satisfied in the first open / close execution mode, and if the end condition is satisfied, the special electric power winning device 36 is closed. At the same time, a closing command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92. In addition, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0", and if it is not "0", the timer counter corresponds to the closing period (specifically, 1 second). Set the information to be used. On the other hand, in the second opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not one opening continuation period has elapsed and whether or not the maximum number of game balls have entered the special electric winning device 36, and one of the conditions is If it is established, the special electric winning device 36 is closed and a closing command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 92. In addition, when the open continuation period has passed, whether or not the value of the open / close count counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", and when the special electric winning device 36 has been won, the number of winnings It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter after subtraction is "0", and if none of them is "0", the timer counter corresponds to the closing period (specifically, 1 second). Set the information to be used. After making these various settings, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the value of the counter is updated to the one corresponding to the special electric closing process (step S310).

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the process during closing of the special electric power in step S310 in the special electric power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

In the special electric closing processing, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is satisfied. Specifically, in the first open / close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the round counter is "0", and in the second open / close execution mode, either the open / close count counter or the winning counter is "0". Determine if it exists. If the end condition of the open / close execution mode is not satisfied, the special electric winning device 36 is opened on the condition that the closing period has elapsed, and in the first open / close execution mode, the winning counter is entered. The upper limit number is set and the open continuation period to the timer counter is set, and in the second open / close execution mode, the open continuation period to the timer counter is set. In addition, a release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92. After that, by subtracting 1 from the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated to the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing (step S309).

On the other hand, if the end condition of the opening / closing execution mode is satisfied, the ending command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 92. The ending command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 92 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various big hit results and the small hit results is the game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the sound / light side MPU 92 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information of the ending period (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the timer counter. By the way, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. After that, by adding 1 to the special electric power counter, the value of the counter is updated to the one corresponding to the special electric power termination process (step S311).

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric power termination process of step S311 in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

In the special train end processing, it is determined whether or not the ending period has passed, and if the ending period has passed, the content of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is used as an opportunity to shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time. Set the content according to the type of jackpot result, and clear the special figure special electric counter to "0". If the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a small hit result, the win / fail lottery mode before the start of the open / close execution mode is maintained as the win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. To.

<Fuzu Fuden control processing>
Next, the general-purpose electric control processing executed in step S215 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When a prize has been generated in the through winning unit 34 (step S601: YES), the maximum number of reserved information on the normal drawing side stored in the first area 117a to the fourth area 117d of the normal drawing holding area 116 is the maximum number. On condition that the number is less than four (step S602: NO), the storage process in the normal figure holding area 116 is executed (step S603). In the storage process, the numerical information of the Fuden random number counter C4 is used as the Fuzu side hold information, and among the areas in which the Fuzu side hold information is not stored in the first area 117a to the fourth area 117d of the Fuzu hold area 116. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order. In addition, when the normal figure side hold information is acquired, the data setting for updating the display contents of the normal figure hold display unit 39b in accordance with the increase in the number of normal figure side hold information is set. Do.

When a negative determination is made in step S601, an affirmative determination is made in step S602, or the process of step S603 is executed, the general-purpose electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read (step S604). .. In the Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the processing content to be executed in the Fuzu Fuden control process.

The Fuzu Fuden counter can take values from "0" to "3", and each value from "0" to "3" corresponds to the start addresses NA0 to NA3 of each process (step S607 to step S610). ing. Specifically, when the value of the normal map normal power counter is "0", the normal figure fluctuation start process (step S607), which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 39a, is executed. Then, when the value of the normal map normal power counter is "1", the normal figure change processing (step S608), which is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 39a, is executed. When the value of the figure Fuden counter is "2", the Fuzu finalizing process (step S609), which is a process for ending the display continuation times in the Fuzu display unit 39a, is executed. When the value of the counter is "3", the process during opening of the general electric power (step S610), which is a process for controlling the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35, is the execution target.

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S604), the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is acquired from the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S605). , Jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S606). Hereinafter, each process of steps S607 to S610 will be described individually.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
First, the normal map fluctuation start process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the normal map fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the normal map side hold information is stored (step S701: YES) (step S702). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 117a of the normal drawing holding area 116 is moved to the execution area 118 for the normal drawing. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the normal figure holding area 116 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 117a to 117d to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area 117a and the second area 117b →. The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area 117a, 3rd area 117c → 2nd area 117b, 4th area 117d → 3rd area 117c. Further, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display contents of the normal figure hold display unit 39b are updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of normal figure hold information this time.

After executing the data setting process, the acceptance determination process is executed (step S703). In the acceptance determination process, the acceptance determination table is read from the main ROM 73, and the read acceptance determination table is used for the ordinary electric random number counter C4 in the general drawing side hold information for which the acceptance determination process is executed this time. Match numerical information. In this case, as already explained, there is a 98% probability that the winning result will be accepted.

When the result of the acceptance determination process is the acceptance winning result (step S704: YES), the stop result setting process for the acceptance winning result is executed (step S705). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the acceptance winning result to be finally stopped and displayed in the current display continuation times on the normal figure display unit 39a is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. It should be noted that one type of pattern stop mode may be set for the acceptance winning result, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for the acceptance winning result.

When the result of the acceptance determination process is not the acceptance winning result (step S704: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S706). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the disengagement result to be finally stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 39a in the current display continuation time is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the acceptance winning result.

After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the specific process of the normal map fluctuation period is executed (step S707). After that, the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 39a is started (step S708). A variable display table for normal drawings is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as a table to be referred to by the main MPU 72 when the normal drawing display unit 39a is used to display the variable display of the pattern. When the variable display of the pattern is executed in the normal figure display unit 39a, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the acceptance determination process. When the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 39a, the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the general map shows the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one lap is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal map display unit 39a, the variable display table for the normal map is repeatedly used until immediately before the final display is performed. After that, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1 (step S709). As a result, the value of the normal map normal power counter becomes "1" corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation processing (step S608).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the normal map fluctuation period in step S707. First, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side stored in the first area 117a to 117d of the normal drawing holding area 116 is equal to or larger than the reference number (step S801). Specifically, the reference number is two.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, a lottery process for selecting a period is executed (step S802). In the lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is periodically (for example, 4 milliseconds cycle) updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in a period selection table stored in advance in the main ROM 73. Match against. The period selection table is set so that the selection winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/500.

When the result of the lottery process for period selection is not the selection winning result but the out-of-selection result (step S803: NO), the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S804). As already explained, the duration of the first display is 0.45 seconds. When the result of the lottery process for period selection is the selection winning result (step S803: YES), the second display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S805). As already explained, the duration of the second display is 10.4 seconds. That is, when the number of reserved information on the general drawing side is less than the reference number, the first display continuation period is selected in the lottery process for period selection unless a selection winning result is obtained, and in the lottery process for period selection. The second display continuation period is selected when the selection winning result is obtained. Since the probability of this selection winning result is 1/500, the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side (specifically). Has a lower probability than 1/200). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since the probability of the selection winning result is set to 1/100 or the like, the probability of the selection winning result is the reserved information on the first special drawing side or the second. The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode may be higher than the probability of a jackpot result (specifically, 1/200) triggered by the hold information on the special figure side, and the probability of a selected winning result is set to 1/200. As a result, the probability that the selection winning result will be the jackpot result in the low probability mode triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side (specifically, 1). The configuration may be the same as / 200).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side is equal to or larger than the reference number, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S806). .. That is, when the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side is equal to or larger than the reference number, the third display continuation period is surely selected without executing the lottery process. As already explained, the duration of the third display is 1 second.

When any of the processes of steps S804 to S806 is executed, the information of the display duration selected in any of steps S804 to S806 is set in the timer counter on the normal side of the main RAM 74 (step S807). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter on the normal drawing side is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

<Processing during fluctuation of general map>
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map in step S608 in the normal drawing control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the normal map fluctuation processing, it is determined whether or not the display is being continuously rotated and the timing is before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the timer counter on the normal drawing side, which measures the display continuation period of the current display continuation times, is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. Before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the normal map display unit 39a is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final display. In addition, this regular change is made in a certain manner regardless of whether or not the result is a winning result. In addition, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 39a is set to the display mode corresponding to the determination result of the acceptance determination process this time. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the normal map normal electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the normal figure changing process to the one corresponding to the normal figure finalizing process.

<Processing during confirmation of general map>
Next, the process during the determination of the normal figure in step S609 in the normal figure general control process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

By determining whether or not the value of the timer counter that measures the display continuation period of the current display continuation time is "0", the final display period of the current display continuation time (specifically, 0. It is determined whether or not 4 seconds) has elapsed (step S901). When the confirmed display period has elapsed (step S901: YES), it is determined whether or not the result of the acceptance determination process in the current display continuation time is the acceptance winning result (step S902). If it is not the result of winning the acceptance (step S902: NO), after clearing the value of the normal drawing counter to "0" (step S903), the processing during confirmation of the normal drawing is terminated.

If it is a winning result (step S902: YES), "1" is set as information on the number of times the special winning device 35 is opened and closed in the general electric opening counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S904). Further, "10" is set as information on the maximum number of winnings to the special winning device 35 in the current acceptance execution state in the general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S905). In addition, information corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set in the timer counter on the normal drawing side as information on the opening duration of the special winning device 35 (step S906). Further, by starting the output of the drive signal to the open / close drive unit 47, the special winning device 35 is put into the receiving state (step S907). After that, the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1. As a result, the value of the normal power counter becomes "3" corresponding to the normal power opening process (step S610).

<Processing while the public train is open>
Next, the process during the opening of the normal power in step S610 in the normal power control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the processing during the opening of the general electric power, when a prize is generated in the special winning device 35, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general electric winning counter of the main RAM 74. Then, when the value of the normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the normal power release counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the output of the drive signal to the open / close drive unit 47 is stopped. The special winning device 35 is set to the non-accepting state. Then, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the Fuzu Fuden control process becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S607). Further, even if the value of the general power winning counter is not "0", if the value of the normal power timer counter of the main RAM 74 is "0", the general power winning counter and the general power of the main RAM 74 The value of the electric release counter is cleared to "0", and the output of the drive signal to the open / close drive unit 47 is stopped to put the special winning device 35 in the non-accepted state. Then, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the Fuzu Fuden control process becomes the Fuzu variation start process (step S607).

<Relationship between the display duration of the general map display unit 39a and the acceptance status of the special winning device 35>
Next, the relationship between the display duration of the general map display unit 39a and the acceptance state of the special winning device 35 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 19 (a) shows the period during which the game ball passes through the through winning unit 34, and FIG. 19 (b) shows the period during which the game ball exists at a position where the special winning device 35 can be won. FIG. 19 (c) shows the period during which the display continuation times are executed on the normal figure display unit 39a, and FIG. 19 (d) shows the period during which the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state. e) indicates the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side.

As described above, all the game balls flowing into the left area PA2 will win the through winning unit 34, and if the game balls continue to be launched so as to flow down the left area PA2, the through winning unit 34 The game ball reaches the position in a cycle of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19A, the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t6, the timing of t8, the timing of t10, the timing of t12, the timing of t14, the timing of t16, the timing of t19 and the timing of t22. A game ball will win a prize in the through winning section 34 in each of the above.

The through winning section 34 has a through hole, and by passing through the through hole, a prize is generated in the through winning section 34, and the game ball that has won the through winning section 34 flows down the game area PA as it is. continue. Then, the game ball that has won the through winning section 34 reaches a position where the special winning device 35 can be won within a range of 0.65 seconds to 0.7 seconds after winning the through winning section 34. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19B, the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t1 reaches the position where the special winning device 35 can be won at the timing of t4, and at the timing of t3. The game ball that won the through winning section 34 reaches the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 at the timing of t7, and the game ball that won the through winning section 34 at the timing of t6 wins the special prize at the timing of t9. The game ball that has reached the position where it is possible to win the device 35 and has won the through winning section 34 at the timing of t8 reaches the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 at the timing of t11, and at t10 The game ball that won the through winning section 34 at the timing reaches the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 at the timing of t13, and the game ball that won the through winning section 34 at the timing of t12 reaches the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 at the timing of t15. The game ball that has reached the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 and has won the through winning section 34 at the timing of t16 reaches the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 at the timing of t20. The game ball that has won the through winning section 34 at the timing of t19 will reach the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 at the timing of t23.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 19 (c), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 19 (c), the timing of t3 ~, triggered by the winning of the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t3 when the display continuation times on the display unit 39a occur and the holding information on the normal drawing side is not stored on hold. The display continuation times in the normal map display unit 39a will occur over the timing of t5. When these display continuation times are started, the display continuation of these display continuation times is continued because the selection winning result is not obtained in the lottery process for period selection (step S802) in the specification process (FIG. 17) of the normal map fluctuation period. The period is the first display continuation period. Then, after the display continuation times of the first display continuation period are completed, the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state at each of the timing of t2 and the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 19D. The first display continuation period is 0.45 seconds as described above, and even if the acceptance execution state is started thereafter, the period during which the acceptance state of the special winning device 35 is maintained by the acceptance execution state is 0. Since it is .1 second, the total period of 0.55 seconds is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, 0.6 seconds. Therefore, no new prize is generated for the through winning unit 34 in the continuous display times of the normal drawing display unit 39a and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35, and as shown in FIG. 19 (e), the normal drawing side. Hold information is not stored on hold.

Further, the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t1 wins the special winning device 35 at the timing of t4, which is the timing after the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 triggered by the game ball ends. The game ball that won the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t3 is the timing of t7, which is the timing after the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 triggered by the game ball is completed. Then, the position where the special winning device 35 can be won is reached. Therefore, these game balls do not win the special prize device 35 in the acceptance execution state executed by themselves. Furthermore, to explain by taking as an example the display continuation times of the normal map display unit 39a from the timing of t3 to the timing of t5, the ball was fired one before the game ball winning the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t3. The game ball will reach the position where the special winning device 35 can be won at the timing of t4, but after the game ball has passed the position where the special winning device 35 can be won, the game Next to the ball, the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 triggered by the game ball winning the through winning unit 34 is started. Therefore, in a situation where the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the general map display unit 39a, basically no prize is generated in the special prize device 35.

As shown in FIG. 19 (c), as shown in FIG. 19 (c), in the normal map display unit 39a from the timing of t6 to the timing of t17, triggered by the winning of the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t6 when the holding information on the normal drawing side is not stored Display continuation times occur. When the display continuation time is started, the display continuation of the display continuation time is continued by the selection winning result in the lottery process for period selection (step S802) in the specification process (FIG. 17) of the normal map fluctuation period. The period is the second display continuation period. The second display continuation period is 10.4 seconds as described above, and even if the acceptance execution state is subsequently started, the period during which the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 is maintained according to the acceptance execution state is Since it is 0.1 seconds, the total period of 10.5 seconds is longer than four times the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), the through winning unit is included in each of the t8 timing, the t10 timing, the t12 timing, and the t14 timing included in the period from the timing of t6 to the timing of t18 corresponding to these total periods. A prize is awarded to 34, and as shown in FIG. 19 (e), the holding information on the normal drawing side is held and stored at each timing. Then, at the timing of t14, the number of reserved stored information on the normal drawing side reaches the upper limit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), at the timing of t18, the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 triggered by the display continuation times started at the timing of t6 ends, so that FIG. 19 (c) shows. As shown, at the timing of t18, a new display continuation time in the normal map display unit 39a is started, and as shown in FIG. 19 (e), the number of reserved information on the normal map side is subtracted by one. To. In this case, since the specification process (FIG. 17) of the normal map fluctuation period in the new display continuation time is executed in the situation where the number of reserved information on the normal map side is equal to or more than the reference number (specifically, 2). The third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period in the specific process. The third display continuation period is 1 second as described above, and even if the acceptance execution state is continuously started after that, the period during which the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 is maintained according to the acceptance execution state is 0. Since it is 1 second, the total period of 1.1 seconds is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19A, the through winning unit 34 is newly added at the timing of t19, which is the timing before the timing at which the new display continuation time of the normal drawing display unit 39a can be started. When a prize is won, as shown in FIG. 19E, the holding information on the normal drawing side is newly acquired at the timing of t19, and the number of holding storages of the holding information on the normal drawing side becomes the upper limit number. As a result, when the number of reserved information on the normal map side becomes equal to or greater than the reference number and the third display continuous period is selected as the display continuous period of the normal map display unit 39a, the left area PA2 flows down. By continuing to launch the game ball in this way, the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected will be continued.

However, the above total period of 1.1 seconds is shorter than twice the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, the number of game balls that win the through winning unit 34 during the total period of the display continuation times of the third display continuation period and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 triggered by the display continuation times is basically one. And at most two. In this case, even if the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side exceeds the reference number due to the selection of the second display continuation period, the display continuation times of the third display continuation period and the display continuation times are triggered. The through winning section 34 is awarded during the total period of the display continuation time of the third display continuation period of the acceptance execution state of the special prize device 35 and the acceptance execution state of the special prize device 35 triggered by the display continuation time. If is not generated once, the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected cannot be continued. Therefore, in a situation where the third display continuation period is selected, attention is paid to whether or not the game ball wins the through winning unit 34, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the situation in which the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side is equal to or greater than the reference number and the third display continuous period is repeatedly selected as the display continuous period of the normal drawing display unit 39a is triggered by the reserved information on the first special drawing side. When the jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process and the first open / close execution mode occurs, the process is automatically terminated. That is, in the first open / close execution mode, the special electric winning device 36 is opened and closed, and a large number of game balls are paid out by generating a prize in the special electric winning device 36. The special electric winning device 36 is provided in the right side region PA3, and when the firing operation is continued so as to flow down the right side region PA3, the through winning unit 34 provided in the left side region PA2 is not won. Then, the longest period required for all the display continuation times of the maximum number of reserved information on the normal drawing side and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 to end is longer than the shortest period required for the first opening / closing execution mode to end. Is also short. Furthermore, one round game in the first open / close execution mode is the longest period required until all the display continuation times of the maximum number of reserved information on the normal drawing side and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 are completed. It is shorter than the shortest time required to finish. Therefore, the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the normal figure display unit 39a can basically be terminated when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs, and the third display continuation period can be terminated. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the display duration is selected from continuing for an excessively long time.

The third display continuation period is selected when the display continuation period is started in a situation where the reference number (specifically, two) or more of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected will occur after the display continuation times due to the second display continuation period have occurred. Further, when the third display continuation period is selected as described above, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, the next display continuation time can be started after the display continuation time in the normal figure display unit 39a is started. The period until the acceptance execution state is 1 second, and even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation times on the normal figure display unit 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state is 1.1 seconds. In this case, the probability of winning the acceptance execution state in the internal lottery corresponding to the occurrence of continuous display times is set to a high probability, specifically 98%. Therefore, when the display continuation times occur, the acceptance execution state generally occurs. In addition, in a situation where the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left side region PA2, one is basically at a position where the special winning device 35 can be entered every 0.6 seconds, which is the firing cycle of the game ball. The game ball arrives at the rate of, but an error of about 0.1 second may occur depending on the flow mode of the game ball. Therefore, when the display continuation times for which the third display continuation period is selected are repeatedly selected, the special winning device 35 is won with a probability of about 1/11. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 19, the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 from the timing of t21 to the timing of t24 after the display continuation times of the third display continuation period extending from the timing of t18 to the timing of t21 is completed. As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the game ball reaches a position where it is possible to win the special prize device 35 at the timing of t23, which is the timing in the middle of the above, so that the game ball wins the special prize device 35. Become. The number of game balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded to the special prize device 35 is 11. That is, in a configuration in which when 11 game balls are supplied to the left side region PA2, one of them may win the special winning device 35, 11 pieces are generated by winning the special winning device 35. Game ball is paid out. Therefore, if the launch of the game ball is continued so as to flow down the left area PA2 in the situation where the display continuation time in which the third display continuation period is selected is repeatedly selected, the player's ball will be held. The increase / decrease is repeated with about 11 pieces, and it is possible to make it possible to hardly increase / decrease the number of balls held by the player during the period in which the display continuation period in which the third display continuation period is selected is repeatedly selected.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A through winning unit 34 and a special winning device 35 are provided in the left area PA2, and a special winning device is obtained by the acceptance determination process executed based on the winning of the game ball in the through winning unit 34. 35 is in the accepting state. Further, when the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state, the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state after the display continuation times including the variable display of the pattern are executed in the normal drawing display unit 39a. As a result, the player can predict in advance that the special winning device 35 will be in the accepting state. In this case, when the third display continuation period is set as the display continuation period of the display continuation times, it is possible to win a prize in the special prize device 35 in the situation where the special prize device 35 is in the accepting state. When the game ball can reach the position, but the first display continuation period is set as the display continuation period of the display continuation times, the special prize device 35 is in the accepting state. The game ball basically does not reach the position where the device 35 can be won. As a result, the player expects that the third display continuation period is set as a predetermined period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since it is possible to cause the above situation by adjusting the display continuation period of the display continuation times, the control of switching the special winning device 35 between the accepted state and the non-accepted state is complicated. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect without any problem.

Regardless of whether the first display continuation period or the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a, the control mode of the special winning device 35 in the acceptance execution state is constant. is there. As a result, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the configuration of the control process for switching the special winning device 35 between the accepted state and the non-accepted state.

The first display duration, in which the special winning device 35 is basically not awarded, is shorter than the third display duration, in which the special winning device 35 can be prized at a predetermined frequency. It has become. As a result, it is possible to prevent one display continuation time corresponding to the fact that the special prize device 35 is basically not generated from being excessively continued.

The third display continuation period is a period equal to or longer than the launch cycle of the game ball, and the first display continuation period is a period shorter than the launch cycle of the game ball. As a result, in a situation where the third display continuation period is set as the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a, one or more game balls are supplied to the positions where the through winning unit 34 can win a prize. While it is possible to expect that, in the situation where the first display continuation period is set, the number of game balls that are wasted in the range in which one display continuation time is executed can be suppressed. Is possible.

In the left side region PA2, the through winning unit 34 is provided on the upstream side of the special winning device 35, and the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 can reach a position where the special winning device 35 can be entered. As a result, it is possible to generate both the winning of the through winning section 34 and the winning of the special winning device 35 by one game ball. In this case, the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 surely reaches the position where the special winning device 35 can be entered. This makes it easier to identify the relative relationship between the timing at which the game ball arrives at the position where the special winning device 35 can enter the special winning device 35 with respect to the timing at which the display continuation rotation of the normal figure display unit 39a is started. It becomes easy to adjust the ease of entering the game ball into the special winning device 35 with respect to the setting of the period.

The first display continuation period is a period shorter than the shortest period required for the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 to reach the position where the special winning device 35 can be entered. As a result, when the first display continuation period is set in the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a, the game ball that wins the through winning unit 34 and starts the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a Can be prevented from winning the special winning device 35.

The first display continuation period is the firing order one before the predetermined game ball when the measurement of the first display continuation period is started when the predetermined game ball wins the through winning unit 34. This is the period elapsed after the game ball of No. 1 has passed the position where the special winning device 35 can be entered. As a result, when the first display continuation period is set in the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a, a predetermined game in which the through winning unit 34 is won and the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a is started. Both the ball and the game ball in the firing order immediately before the predetermined game ball win the special winning device 35 which is in the accepted state based on the winning of the through winning section 34 by the predetermined game ball. It is possible to avoid it. Therefore, when the first display continuation period is set in the display continuation times of the general drawing display unit 39a, it is possible to basically disable the winning of the special winning device 35.

When the third display continuation period is set in the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a, the special winning device 35 is reached when the game balls are continuously supplied to the positions where the special winning device 35 can win a prize. The probability of winning a prize is 1/11, whereas when one game ball is won in the special prize device 35, 11 game balls are given to the player. As a result, when the third display continuation period is set, it is possible to aim for a prize in the special winning device 35 while substantially not increasing or decreasing the number of game balls owned by the player.

When the first display continuation period is set in the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a, even if the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs after the display continuation time, the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a The period required to start a new game is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when the first display continuation period is set, the general drawing side hold information is basically not acquired. As a result, when the first display continuation period is set, the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a are started at the timing when the game ball wins the through winning unit 34, so that the first display In the situation where the duration is set, the relationship between the timing when the game ball reaches the position where the special winning device 35 can be entered and the timing when the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state is the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to make the relationship assumed in. Therefore, when the first display continuation period is set, it becomes easy to design so that the special winning device 35 basically does not receive a prize.

When the third display continuation period is set in the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a, the normal figure display unit 39a regardless of whether or not the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs after the display continuation time. The period required to newly start the display continuation times of is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when the third display continuation period is set, the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a are likely to be started at a timing different from the timing when the through winning unit 34 is awarded. Therefore, when the third display continuation period is set, the relationship between the timing at which the game ball reaches the position where the special winning device 35 can be entered and the timing at which the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state is determined. It can be irregular.

When the display continuation times of the normal map display unit 39a are started in the situation where the holding information on the normal map side is not stored in the holding state of the reference number or more, the first display continuation period is set as the display continuation period of the display continuation times. A third display continuation period is set as the display continuation period of the display continuation times when the display continuation times of the ordinary map display unit 39a are started in a situation where the holding information on the normal map side of the reference number or more is held and stored. .. As a result, the player who expects the special winning device 35 to win a prize will pay attention to whether or not the holding information on the normal drawing side of the reference number or more is acquired, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, as described above, when the third display continuation period is set, the display continuation of the general drawing display unit 39a is performed regardless of whether or not the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs after the display continuation times. The period required to start a new round is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. As a result, once the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side that exceeds the reference number is temporarily stored, the situation in which the third display continuation period is set is maintained by continuously generating a prize in the through winning unit 34. Is possible.

The reference number is set as a plurality of numbers. As a result, in a situation where the first display continuation period is set in the display continuation times of the normal map display unit 39a, a prize is accidentally generated in the through winning unit 34, and one normal map side hold information is acquired. Even so, the third display duration is not set after that. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the third display continuation period is set to occur.

It is possible to win a prize in the special winning device 35 at a predetermined frequency when the display continuous rotation of the normal drawing display unit 39a is started in a situation where the holding information on the normal drawing side is stored in the holding state of the reference number or more. The third display duration is set. As a result, the advantage of the player differs depending on the status of the hold storage of the hold information on the normal map side, so that the player can pay attention to whether or not the hold information on the normal figure side is held and stored. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second display continuation period is set in the display continuation times of the ordinary map display unit 39a by selecting and winning in the lottery process for period selection in the situation where the reserved information on the normal map side is not stored in the hold of the reference number or more. To. Then, when the second display continuation period is set, the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a is newly set regardless of whether or not the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs after the display continuation time. By the time it is possible to start the game, it is possible to make the through winning unit 34 win a number of game balls larger than the reference number. As a result, in a situation where the first display continuation period is repeatedly set in the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a, it is possible to generate an opportunity to switch to a situation in which the third display continuation period is set. .. Further, such switching can be realized by setting the display duration.

When the second display continuation period is set, it is possible to make the through winning section 34 win a number of game balls that are two or more more than the reference number. In this case, the holding information on the normal drawing side is the reference number. Two or more will be stored on hold. As a result, when the second display continuation period is set, it is possible to continue the situation in which the third display continuation period is set for a long time in the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a. Become.

The through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided in the left side area PA2, while the special electric winning device 36 is provided in the right side area PA3. As a result, the transition to the open / close execution mode occurred in a situation where the number of reserved information on the normal map side exceeding the reference number is stored on hold and the third display continuation period is repeatedly set in the display continuous times of the normal map display unit 39a. In this case, even if the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a, which is the third display continuation period, is executed in parallel with the open / close execution mode, the firing operation is performed aiming at winning the special electric winning device 36, and the through operation is performed. Since no prize is given to the winning unit 34, the holding information on the normal drawing side, which is equal to or larger than the reference number, is not stored on hold during the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to end the situation in which the third display continuation period is repeatedly set when the open / close execution mode occurs, so that the situation in which the third display continuation period is repeatedly set does not continue excessively. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, for the shortest period required from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, in a situation where the maximum number of reserved information on the normal map side is reserved and stored, more than the reference number of reserved information on the normal map side is reserved and stored. It is set to a period longer than the longest period required for the display continuation times of the general map display unit 39a to be started in a situation where the display is not performed. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode occurs, it is possible to reliably end the situation in which the third display continuation period is repeatedly set.

The winning / failing determination process is executed by acquiring the hold information on the first special drawing side based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning device 35, and the opening / closing execution is executed when the jackpot result is selected in the winning / failing determination process. The mode occurs. As a result, it is expected that a prize will be generated in the special winning device 35, and as a result, whether or not the second display continuation period or the third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation times of the general map display unit 39a. It is possible to draw the attention of the crab player. Further, even when a prize is generated in the special prize device 35 in a configuration in which the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired based on the prize in the first operating unit 32, the first special figure side Hold information is acquired. As a result, the player who expects to shift to the open / close execution mode expects not only a prize for the first operating unit 32 but also a prize for the special prize device 35, which is a hobby of the game. It is possible to improve.

The first operating unit 32, the through winning unit 34, and the special winning device 35 are all provided at positions where the game ball can reach when the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side region PA2. As a result, by performing a firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2, it is possible to aim for the generation of a prize for all of the first operating unit 32, the through winning unit 34, and the special winning device 35. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complicated firing operation.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
(1) When the open / close execution mode occurs, the hold information on the normal drawing side may be deleted. In this case, if the open / close execution mode is set in the situation where the third display continuation period is selected, it is possible to forcibly shift to the situation where the third display continuation period is not selected, triggered by the open / close execution mode. ..

(2) Even if the holding information on the normal drawing side is acquired, the special winning device 35 will not be in the acceptance execution state unless the acceptance winning result is obtained in the acceptance judgment process, but when the holding information on the normal drawing side is acquired. The special winning device 35 may be surely put into the acceptance execution state, and the special winning device 35 may be in the acceptance execution state with a probability of about 100% when the holding information on the normal drawing side is acquired. Good.

(3) Instead of the configuration in which the holding information on the first special drawing side is acquired when a prize is won in the special winning device 35, the holding information on the second special drawing side may be acquired. In this configuration, for example, a combination of a through winning unit 34 and a special winning device 35 is provided in the right area PA3 instead of the second operating unit 33, and when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the display unit 39a is displayed. When the first display continuation period is selected in the continuation time and the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the third display continuation period may be selected in the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a. As a result, in the low-probability mode, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the special winning device 35, and in the high-probability mode, the special winning device 35 can be won or easily won. It will be possible. In addition, in this configuration, since it is necessary to have a configuration in which the reserved information on the second special figure side is acquired frequently in the high probability mode, the special winning device 35 when the third display continuation period is selected is used. It is preferable to increase the winning frequency of. Further, in the configuration, it is not preferable that the number of balls held by the player is extremely increased based on the winning of the special winning device 35. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the special winning device 35 is one. It is preferable to use two or two.

(4) The second operating unit 33 is not provided in the configuration in which the holding information on the second special drawing side is acquired when a prize is generated in the special winning device 35 as in the other form of the above (3). On the other hand, the combination of the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 is provided in the upper region PA1, the left side region PA2 or the lower region PA4, and the game ball is provided in the game region PA so that it can flow down toward the first operating portion 32. If it is supplied, a prize may be generated in the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35. In this configuration, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the first display continuation period is basically selected in the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a, and the second display continuation period is set with a predetermined probability. When the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the third display continuation period may be selected in the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a. As a result, while the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired based on the winning of the special winning device 35 in the high probability mode, the special winning device 35 is won with a predetermined probability even in the low probability mode. Based on this, it is possible to acquire the reserved information on the second special drawing side. In addition, in this configuration, since it is necessary to have a configuration in which the reserved information on the second special figure side is acquired frequently in the high probability mode, the special winning device 35 when the third display continuation period is selected is used. It is preferable to increase the winning frequency of. Further, in the configuration, it is not preferable that the number of balls held by the player is extremely increased based on the winning of the special winning device 35. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out based on the winning of the special winning device 35 is one. It is preferable to use two or two.

(5) Depending on the execution mode of the open execution state of the special winning device 35 in the first embodiment or another embodiment of the above (4), it is difficult for the special winning device 35 to win a prize, and the special winning device 35 There may be a game state in which a prize is likely to occur. Specifically, in the former game state, the open execution state of the special winning device 35 is performed in the manner described in the first embodiment, and in the latter game state, the display unit 39a is displayed. The open execution state of the special winning device 35 is set so that the special winning device 35 is likely to be won regardless of the display continuation period in the continuous times. As a result, it is possible to generate a state in which a prize is generated in the special prize device 35 regardless of the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a. The latter gaming state may be configured to occur when the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, or may be added to or replaced with the configuration that is surely generated after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .. Further, in the case of the latter gaming state, the latter gaming state may be continued until the next opening / closing execution mode occurs, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the latter gaming state may be continued. The latter game state may be continued, or the latter game state may be continued from the end of the open / close execution mode until a predetermined number of game times are executed, and the end lottery may be used. The latter gaming state may be continued until the player is elected.

(6) The number of reserved information on the normal map side, which is a reference for setting the third display continuous period in the continuous display times of the normal map display unit 39a, is not limited to two, but is one. It may be three or four, which is the upper limit. When the reference number is 1, in a situation where two or more pieces of hold information on the normal figure side are held and stored, when the display continuation time of the normal figure display unit 39a is newly started, the display continuation time is used. Since the third display continuation period is set, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention of the player to the holding and storage of the holding information on the normal drawing side.

(7) The number of reserved information on the normal map side, which is a reference for setting the third display continuous period in the continuous display times of the normal map display unit 39a, may be changed according to the gaming state. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting a small reference number of game states.

(8) The display continuation period of the general map display unit 39a is not limited to the configuration in which both the second display continuation period and the third display continuation period exist, and one of them is used. When a certain target period exists and the selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process (step S802) for period selection in the specific process (FIG. 17) of the normal map fluctuation period, and the number of reserved information on the normal map side is If the number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the target period may be set. When the third display continuation period is set as the target period, it is necessary to cause a situation in which the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side exceeds the reference number. Therefore, the third display continuation period is set to the above first. It is preferable to make it longer than the embodiment or reduce the number of reference numbers.

(9) If the display continuation time of the normal map display unit 39a cannot be started and the display continuation time is started after that, the third display continuation period May be set. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the third display duration is set.

(10) When the special electric winning device 36 is in the open state, a game ball can be entered into the special electric winning device 36, and when the special electric winning device 36 is in the closed state, the game ball can be entered into the special electric winning device 36. It is not limited to the configuration in which it is not possible to enter the ball, and even when the special electric winning device 36 is in the closed state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 36, but it is in the open state. The configuration may be such that it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special electric winning device 36 than in the case.

(11) Limited to a configuration in which a third display continuation period is surely set when the display continuation times of the normal map display unit 39a are started in a situation where the number of reserved information on the normal map side is held and stored in excess of the reference number. It may be configured so that the third display continuation period can be easily set. Specifically, regardless of whether the number of reserved information on the normal map side is not stored on hold or the number of reserved information on the normal map side is stored on hold, the normal map display unit 39a Although the third display continuation period can be set in the display continuation times, the situation in which the number of reserved information on the normal map side is held and stored is larger than the situation in which the reserved information on the normal figure side is not held and stored. The third display continuation period may be more easily set in the display continuation times of the normal map display unit 39a.

(12) Instead of the configuration in which the third display continuation period is set when the reference number or more of the normal map side hold information is held and stored at the timing of determining the display continuation period in the display continuation time of the normal map display unit 39a. When the data setting process (step S702) in the normal map fluctuation start process (FIG. 16) is held and stored at a timing before the data setting process (step S702) is executed, the third display duration is set. It may be a configuration to be set.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the specific processing of the normal map fluctuation period in the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a specific process of the normal map fluctuation period in the present embodiment. When the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side is not equal to or greater than the reference number (step S1001: NO), the lottery process for period selection is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment (step S1002), and the result is not the selected winning result. (Step S1003: NO), the first display continuation period is selected (step S1004), and if it is a winning result (step S1003: YES), the second display continuation period is selected (step S1005).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S1001: YES), the lottery process for short-term selection is executed (step S1006). In the lottery process for short-term selection, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is periodically (for example, 4 milliseconds cycle) updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 for a short period of time. Match against the selection table. The short-term selection table is set so that the selection winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/300, which is higher than the probability that the selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for period selection in step S1002. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be lower than the probability that the selection winning result will be obtained in the lottery process for period selection in step S1002, or may be the same or substantially the same configuration.

When the result of the lottery process for short-term selection is not the selection winning result but the wrong result (step S1007: NO), the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S1008). .. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery process for short-term selection is the selection winning result (step S1007: YES), the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S1004).

When any of the processes of step S1004, step S1005, and step S1008 is executed, the information of the display duration selected in any of these processes is set in the timer counter on the normal side of the main RAM 74 (step S1009). ..

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side is equal to or greater than the reference number, the selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for short-term selection. Is selected for the first display duration instead of the third display duration. Then, when the first display continuation period is selected, a new game ball is awarded to the through winning unit 34 during the total period of the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 39a and the subsequent acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35. Can not be expected. As a result, even if the number of reserved information on the normal map side is equal to or greater than the reference number, the first display continuation period is selected instead of the third display continuation period as the display continuation period of the normal map display unit 39a. Even in a situation where the number of reserved information on the normal map side is equal to or greater than the reference number, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display continuation period of the normal map display unit 39a.

If the selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for short-term selection, the display continuation period of the normal map display unit 39a is until the number of reserved information on the normal map side reaches the reference number or becomes 0. The first display duration may be reliably selected as the above. As a result, it is possible to reliably end the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected when the selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for short-term selection.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the positions where the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided in the game area PA are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 21 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 21, the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided in the upper region PA1 instead of the left region PA2. Specifically, the through winning portion 34 is located near the exit of the guide rail partitioned by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26, in the passage direction of the guide rail and the axial direction of the through hole of the through winning portion 34. It is provided so as to match. As a result, the game ball launched into the game area PA will surely win the through winning section 34 regardless of whether the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 or the right side area PA3, and the game ball. If the firing of the game ball is continued, the through winning unit 34 will surely be awarded in the firing cycle of the game ball.

The special winning device 35 is provided at a position closer to the left side in the upper region PA1. Further, in the special winning device 35, the upright wall 48 is present at the right end of the base body 41, and the upper surface of the ball receiving surface 44 and the opening / closing member 43 arranged at the non-receiving position is inclined downward toward the left. It is installed in. In this case, by launching the game ball with the strength that the game ball hits the standing wall 48, it is possible to surely reach the position where the special prize device 35 can be won.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform the firing operation of the game ball so that the through winning unit 34 is surely generated, and the special winning device 35 is surely reached the position where the winning is possible. It becomes possible to perform a launch operation of a game ball.

Further, since the number of obstacle members for changing the flow direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 is reduced, the arrival cycle of the game ball to the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 The arrival cycle of the game ball to the position where the prize can be won is likely to be the same as or substantially the same as the launch cycle of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to bring the acquisition mode of the holding information on the pachinko machine side and the winning mode to the special winning device 35 with respect to the selection mode of the display duration in the pachinko machine display unit 39a close to the mode assumed at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. ..

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment, and is executed when a prize is generated in the first operating unit 32 and when a prize is generated in the special winning device 35. The processing content is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left side area PA2, a right side area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by the variable display unit 37 as in the first embodiment. The lower region PA4 is provided with a first actuating portion 32 as in the first embodiment. Further, the left side region PA2 is provided with a through winning unit 34 and a special winning device 35 as in the first embodiment. In this case, since the first guide area 49a and the second guide area 49b are also provided in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 surely wins the through winning section 34 and also wins. The game ball that has won the through winning section 34 surely reaches the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35. Further, the relative positional relationship between the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

The right region PA3 is not provided with the second operating unit 33 and the special electric winning device 36 according to the first embodiment, but instead is provided with the first general electric device 121 and the second general electric device 122. .. If the first general electric device 121 and the second general electric device 122 are fired so as to flow down the left side area PA2, the prize cannot be won, and the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right side area PA3. By doing so, it is possible to win a prize.

The first general electric device 121 is provided with a first general electric accessory 121a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the first general electric accessory 121a is closed, the game ball cannot win the first general electric device 121, and when the first general electric accessory 121a is in the open state, it is possible to win a prize in the first general electric device 121. Will be. The first universal power detection sensor 121c that detects the game ball that has won a prize in the first general electric drive unit 121b for opening and closing the first general electric accessory 121a and the first general electric device 121 are both the main control device 70 and electricity. Is connected. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the first general electric drive unit 121b, the first general electric accessory 121a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the first general electric accessory 121a is stopped. Returns to the closed state. Further, the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the first general electric device 121 based on the detection result of the first general electric detection sensor 121c.

The second general electric device 122 is provided with a second general electric accessory 122a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the second general electric accessory 122a is closed, the game ball cannot win the second general electric device 122, and when the second general electric accessory 122a is opened, the second general electric device 122 can be won. Will be. The second general electric drive unit 122b for opening and closing the second general electric accessory 122a and the second general electric detection sensor 122c for detecting the winning game ball in the second general electric device 122 are both the main control device 70 and electricity. Is connected. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the second utility drive unit 122b, the second utility accessory 122a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the second utility accessory 122a is stopped. Returns to the closed state. Further, the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the second general electric device 122 based on the detection result of the second general electric detection sensor 122c. The first general electric device 121 and the second general electric device 122 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals so that the first general electric device 121 faces upward.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first general electric device is won by an internal lottery executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35. 121 is in the open state. In addition, the second general electric device 122 is opened by winning the internal lottery executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first general electric device 121. Regardless of which of the first and second electric devices 121 and the second general electric device 122, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball. ..

In addition to the first general electric device 121 and the second general electric device 122, a third general electric device 123 is provided. The third general electric device 123 is provided in the left side region PA2 on the downstream side of the special winning device 35. Therefore, a game ball that has flowed into the left side region PA2 and has not won the special prize device 35 can win the third general electric device 123. The game balls that have flowed into the left side area PA2 but have not won the special winning device 35 and the third general electric device 123 flow into the lower area PA4. The game ball may win a prize in the first operating unit 32.

The third general electric device 123 is provided with a third general electric accessory 123a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the third general electric accessory 123a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the third general electric device 123, and when the third general electric accessory 123a is in the open state, it is possible to win a prize in the third general electric device 123. Will be. The third universal power detection sensor 123c that detects the game ball that has won a prize in the third general electric drive unit 123b for opening and closing the third general electric accessory 123a and the third general electric device 123 are both the main control device 70 and electricity. Is connected. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the third utility drive unit 123b, the third utility accessory 123a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the third utility accessory 123a is stopped. Returns to the closed state. Further, the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the third general electric device 123 based on the detection result of the third general electric detection sensor 123c.

A specific operating unit 124 for causing an opportunity to open the third general electric device 123 is provided on the stage 37a of the variable display unit 37. Specifically, the specific actuating portion 124 is formed in the variable display unit 37 so as to open toward the front at the center in the lateral direction of the back wall 125 defining the back side of the stage 37a. The game ball that has entered the specific operating unit 124 is led out to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged downward. A specific detection sensor 124a is provided at an intermediate position of the discharge passage. The specific detection sensor 124a is electrically connected to the main control device 70, and the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the specific operating unit 124 based on the detection result of the specific detection sensor 124a. When a game ball enters the specific operating unit 124, five game balls are paid out for each entry of the game ball. The game ball supplied on the stage 37a but not entered the specific operating unit 124 flows into the lower region PA4. The game ball that has flowed into the lower region PA4 can enter the first operating unit 32. The third general electric device 123 is opened by winning the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific operating unit 124. When a game ball enters the third general electric device 123, 15 game balls are paid out for each entry of the game ball.

A game ball that has entered the introduction port 126 provided in the upper left portion of the variable display unit 37 is supplied onto the stage 37a. A game ball that has reached the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper region PA1 can enter the introduction port 126 in the process of flowing down toward the left region PA2. However, the game ball that has reached the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper region PA1 does not surely enter the introduction port 126 in the process of flowing down toward the left region PA2. Only one of the ten game balls that flow down in is inserted. Further, the game balls that have entered the introduction port 126 will be supplied onto the stage 37a through the warp passage 127 provided in the variable display unit 37, but all of the game balls supplied on the stage 37a are specified. Only the game ball whose lateral moving speed of the game ball is sufficiently decelerated in front of the specific operating unit 124, which is the center of the lateral direction on the stage 37a, does not enter the operating unit 124. Enter the ball. This ball entry probability is such that one game ball out of the ten game balls supplied on the stage 37a enters. With the above configuration, the game ball flowing down toward the left side region PA2 can enter the specific operating unit 124, and the game ball flowing down toward the right side region PA3 cannot enter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the game ball flows down toward the right side area PA3, the game ball that flows down toward the left side area PA2 is the right side area although it can enter the specific operating unit 124. The configuration may be such that it is easier to enter the specific operating unit 124 than the game ball flowing down toward PA3.

When the game ball is launched so as to reach the left side of the variable display unit 37 in the upper region PA1, the game ball surely flows down the left region PA2 without entering the introduction port 126. It will be. Then, when the game ball is launched in the launch mode, the game ball will surely win the through winning unit 34.

In the area on the lower right side of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass, the first normal figure display unit 131, the second normal figure display unit 132, the third normal figure display unit 133, the fourth normal figure display unit 134, and the first normal The figure hold display unit 135, the second normal figure hold display unit 136, and the third normal figure hold display unit 137 are provided. Each of the first normal figure display units 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible for the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 51, but the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure It is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the display unit 134. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the patterns displayed on the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters Is displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable. Further, the display range of the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Further, the display range for both the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 and the first normal figure hold display unit 135 to the third normal figure hold display unit 137 is also the display range of the symbol display device 51. The area is narrower than the display surface. As a result, the player's attention to the symbol display device 51 is higher than that of the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 and the first normal figure hold display unit 135 to the third normal figure hold display unit 137. It becomes possible to increase.

Based on the game ball entering the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, the first normal drawing display unit 131 performs display continuation times including a variable display of the pattern. Further, the first normal figure holding display unit 135 is provided at a position adjacent to the first normal figure display unit 131. Up to four pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls won in the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 are held as the first normal drawing side holding information, and the holding is held by lighting the first normal drawing holding display unit 135. The number is displayed.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the first general electric device 121, the display continuous times including the variable display of the pattern are performed in the second general drawing display unit 132. Further, the second normal figure holding display unit 136 is provided at a position adjacent to the second normal figure display unit 132. Up to four pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls winning in the first normal electric device 121 are held as the second normal figure side hold information, and the hold number is displayed by lighting the second normal figure hold display unit 136. It has become so.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific operating unit 124, the display continuation times including the variation display of the pattern are performed in the third normal drawing display unit 133. Further, the third normal figure holding display unit 137 is provided at a position adjacent to the third normal figure display unit 133. Up to 4 pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls winning in the specific operating unit 124 are held as the third normal figure side hold information, and the hold number is displayed by lighting the third normal figure hold display unit 137. It has become.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the through winning unit 34, the display continuation time including the variation display of the pattern is performed in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. Here, the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is not provided with the normal figure hold display unit. That is, the fourth general drawing side hold information acquired when a prize is won in the through winning section 34 is not stored on hold.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 72>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

The main MPU 72 uses various counter information during the game to perform a winning lottery, set the display of the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134, set the display continuous rotation effect of the symbol display device 51, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23, a lottery as to whether or not the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, and the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 122 are performed. The normal electric random number counter C11 used for the lottery for whether or not the general electric device 123 is set to the open execution state, and the reach random number used for the reach generation lottery when the display continues to be repeated in the symbol display device 51. The counter C12, the random number initial value counter C13 used for setting the initial value of the general electric random number counter C11, and the variation type counter C14 used when determining the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the first general figure display unit 131. , Is to be used.

Each of the counters C11 to C14 is a loop counter in which "1" is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The counters C11 to C14 are updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the Pseudo-random number counter C11 is stored in the 1st Pseudo-random number holding area 141 provided in the main RAM 74 when a prize is generated in the 1st operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, and the 1st Pseudo-random number counter C11 is stored. When a prize is generated in the device 121, it is stored in the second normal drawing holding area 142 provided in the main RAM 74, and when a prize is generated in the specific operating unit 124, the third normal is provided in the main RAM 74. It is stored in the drawing holding area 143, and is stored in the fourth normal drawing execution area 144 provided in the main RAM 74 when a prize is generated in the through winning unit 34.

The first general drawing reservation area 141 includes a first area 141a, a second area 141b, a third area 141c, and a fourth area 141d, and is in accordance with the winning history of the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35. , Numerical information of the universal random number counter C11 is stored in any of the areas 141a to 141d as the first general map side hold information. In this case, in the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d, when the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 141a → the second area 141b → the second area 141d. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 3 area 141c → 4th area 141d. By providing the four areas 141a to 141d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the first general figure holding area 141 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular. In addition to the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d, the first ordinary drawing holding area 141 is provided with the first ordinary drawing execution area 141e. The execution area 141e for the first normal figure is an area in which the hold information on the first normal figure side to be subjected to the open determination process is stored when the display continuation times are started by the first normal figure display unit 131. The first normal map side hold information stored in the first normal map side 141a is shifted to the first normal map execution area 141e when the display continuation times of the first normal figure display unit 131 are started.

The second general drawing reservation area 142 includes the first area 142a, the second area 142b, the third area 142c, and the fourth area 142d, and the normal electric random number is matched with the winning history of the first general electric device 121. The numerical information of the counter C11 is stored in any of the areas 142a to 142d as the second general drawing side hold information. In this case, in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d, when the winning of the first general electric device 121 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 142a → the second area 142b → the third area 142c → Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area 142d. By providing the four areas 142a to 142d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first general electric device 121 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the second general drawing holding area 142 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, five or more. , May be singular. In addition to the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d, the second ordinary drawing holding area 142 is provided with the second ordinary drawing execution area 142e. The second normal figure execution area 142e is an area in which the second normal figure side hold information to be subjected to the open determination process is stored when the display continuous times are started by the second normal figure display unit 132. The second normal map side hold information stored in the first normal area 142a is shifted to the second normal figure execution area 142e when the display continuation times of the second normal figure display unit 132 are started.

The third normal figure holding area 143 includes a first area 143a, a second area 143b, a third area 143c, and a fourth area 143d, and the normal electric random number counter C11 is provided according to the winning history of the specific operating unit 124. The numerical information of is stored in any of the areas 143a to 143d as the third general drawing side reserved information. In this case, in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d, when the specific operating unit 124 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 143a → the second area 143b → the third area 143c → the fourth. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of area 143d. By providing the four areas 143a to 143d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the specific operating unit 124 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the third general figure holding area 143 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, five or more. , May be singular. In addition to the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d, the third ordinary drawing holding area 143 is provided with the third ordinary drawing execution area 143e. The execution area 143e for the third normal figure is an area in which the hold information on the third normal figure side to be subjected to the open determination process is stored when the display continuation times are started by the third normal figure display unit 133. The third normal map side hold information stored in the first area 143a is shifted to the third normal figure execution area 143e when the display continuation times of the third normal figure display unit 133 are started.

In the execution area 144 for the fourth normal figure, a situation in which the display continuous times can be started in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 (that is, the display continuous times are not performed in the fourth normal figure display unit 134, and the display continuous times are not performed. Further, when a prize is generated in the through winning unit 34 in a situation where the special winning device 35 is not in the acceptance execution state), the numerical information of the general electric random number counter C11 is stored as the fourth general drawing side hold information. Here, as described above, the first to fourth areas 141a to 141d, 142a to 142d, and 143a to 143d are included in the first normal figure holding area 141, the second normal figure holding area 142, and the third normal figure holding area 143. In contrast to the configuration in which the corresponding normal map side hold information is held and stored even in a situation where the corresponding normal map display units 131 to 133 cannot start the display continuation times. As for the 4th normal drawing side reserved information, only the 4th normal drawing execution area 144 is provided, and the area for holding and storing the 4th normal drawing side holding information is not provided. As a result, it is possible to handle the presence / absence of the reserved memory differently between the 1st to 3rd ordinary drawing side reserved information and the 4th ordinary drawing side reserved information.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric random number counter C11 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C11 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In this case, when the normal electric random number counter C11 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter C13 at that time is read as the initial value of the general electric random number counter C11. The random number initial value counter C13 is a loop counter similar to the general electric random number counter C11 (value = 0 to 99).

The normal electric random number counter C11 is updated periodically, and as described above, the value of the general electric random number counter C11 at that time is the first normal figure at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35. It is stored in the holding area 141, and the value of the normal electric random number counter C11 at that time is stored in the second normal drawing holding area 142 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first normal electric device 121, and the game ball is stored in the specific operating unit 124. The value of the normal electric random number counter C11 at that time is stored in the third normal figure holding area 143 at the timing when the prize is won, and the value of the general electric random number counter C11 at that time is stored at the timing when the game ball wins the through winning unit 34. It is stored in the execution area 144 for the fourth normal drawing. Then, at a predetermined timing, whether or not to control the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 to the open execution state by the value of the stored general electric random number counter C11. The opening determination is performed, and the acceptance determination as to whether or not to control the special winning device 35 to the acceptance execution state is performed.

Although there is no mode for changing the winning probability in the opening determination and the acceptance determination, a mode for changing the winning probability may exist. For example, there may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of modes for different winning probabilities in the opening determination using the first normal figure holding information stored in the first normal figure holding area 141, and the second normal figure holding area 142. There may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of modes for different winning probabilities in the opening determination using the second normal figure side hold information stored in, and the third normal figure stored in the third normal figure hold area 143. There may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of modes for different winning probabilities in the opening judgment using the side hold information, and acceptance using the fourth normal figure side hold information stored in the execution area 144 for the fourth normal figure. A configuration may be configured in which a plurality of modes having different winning probabilities in the determination exist.

Next, the reach random number counter C12 will be described. The reach random number counter C12 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C12 is periodically updated, and the value of the reach random number counter C12 at that time is acquired at the timing of starting the display continuation times including the variable display of the pattern on the first general figure display unit 131. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display continuation times on the first general figure display unit 131 are started, the symbol display device 51 corresponds to the effect for the game times in the first embodiment. When the symbol variation display is started and the display continuation times on the first general symbol display unit 131 are terminated, the final stop display after the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 51 is terminated. Then, when the stop result corresponding to the opening execution state of the first normal electric device 121 is displayed on the first normal figure display unit 131, the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51. When the stop result corresponding to the fact that the first normal electric device 121 is not set to the open execution state is displayed in the first normal figure display unit 131, the symbol display device 51 corresponds to the deviation result different from the combination of the same symbols. The combination of symbols to be used is stopped and displayed. When the display continuation times corresponding to the deviation result are executed in the configuration, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach display on the symbol display device 51 by using the value of the reach random number counter C12.

Next, the variable type counter C14 will be described. The variation type counter C14 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of "0 to 198" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter C14 is used in determining the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 by the main MPU 72.

<1st Fuden control process>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the first normal figure normal electric control process for performing the execution control of the display continuous times in the first normal figure display unit 131 and the execution control of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121 will be described. FIG. 24 is a slow chart showing the first normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated in the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 (step S1101: YES), the first stored in the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d of the first general drawing holding area 141. On condition that the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side is less than four, which is the upper limit (step S1102: NO), the storage process in the first normal drawing holding area 141 is executed (step S1103). In the storage process, the numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C11 is stored as the first general-purpose map side hold information, and the first general-purpose map side hold information in the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d of the first general figure hold area 141 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. When the first normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display contents of the first normal figure hold display unit 135 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the first normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S1101, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, or the process of step S1103 is executed, whether or not the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, or a special winning device It is determined whether or not 35 is in the acceptance execution state (step S1104). If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the processes of steps S1105-step S1107 are executed. These processes will be described later. After that, the first general-purpose electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read out (step S1108). In the 1st Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the 1st Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The first Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first Fuzu Fuden control process on the main MPU 72.

The first normal figure normal electric counter can take the value of "0" to "4", and each value of "0" to "4" is the start address NA10 to NA14 of each process (step S1111 to step S1115). It corresponds to. Specifically, when the value of the first normal figure counter is "0", the first normal figure fluctuation start process (1st normal figure fluctuation start process) which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 ( Step S1111) is the execution target, and when the value of the first normal figure counter is "1", the first normal figure variation which is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131. When the middle process (step S1112) is the execution target and the value of the first normal figure counter is "2", the first process is for ending the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131. The process during determination of the normal figure (step S1113) is the execution target, and when the value of the first normal figure counter is "3", it is a process for controlling the open state of the first normal electric device 121. 1 The process during opening of the normal power (step S1114) is the execution target, and when the value of the normal power counter in the first figure is "4", it is a process for reopening the first normal power device 121. The process during closing of the first normal electric power (step S1115) is the execution target.

In the first Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the first Fuzu Fuden address table (step S1108), the start address corresponding to the information of the first Fuzu Fuden counter is set to the first Fuzu Fuden address. It is acquired from the table (step S1109) and jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1110). Hereinafter, each process of steps S1111 to S1115 will be described individually.

In the first normal figure fluctuation start process of step S1111, on the condition that the first normal figure side hold information is held and stored in the first normal figure holding area 141, it is held and stored in the first normal figure holding area 141. Executes the process of shifting the pending information on the first normal map side. Specifically, the hold information on the first normal map side stored in the first area 141a of the first normal figure hold area 141 is shifted to the execution area 141e for the first normal figure, and then the second area 141b → first. The 1st area reserved information is shifted so that 1 area 141a, 3rd area 141c → 2nd area 141b, and 4th area 141d → 3rd area 141c. When the hold information on the first normal figure side is shifted, the display content of the hold display unit 135 on the first normal figure is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the first normal figure side this time. Set the data to do so.

In the first normal map fluctuation start process, after the above shift process is executed, the first normal map open lottery process is performed using the first normal map side hold information newly shifted to the first normal map execution area 141e as a lottery value. To execute. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the first public power opening in the first public power opening lottery process is constant regardless of the gaming state, and specifically, the probability of winning the first public power is 1/100. It will be an open win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the first public electric train opening may be higher or lower than this.

In the first normal figure fluctuation start process, when the first normal electric open lottery process is executed, a process for specifying the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is executed. In the specific process, it is first determined whether or not the display continuation time this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. Specifically, it is determined that a reach effect will occur when the display continuation times this time correspond to the first public electric opening winning. In addition, even when the display continuation times this time do not correspond to the first public electric open winning, the value of the reach random number counter C12 is acquired, and the value of the acquired reach random number counter C12 corresponds to the reach generation. If it is numerical information, it is determined that a reach effect will occur. When it is determined that the reach effect is generated, the reach generation table is read from the main ROM 73, and the display continuation period is determined by collating the read reach generation table with the current numerical information of the variation type counter C14. Then, the determined display duration information is set in the first timer counter provided in the main RAM 74. When it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, the non-reach table is read from the main ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the variation type counter C14 and the current first number 1 for the read non-reach table. The display duration is determined by collating the combination of the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side, and the determined display duration information is set in the first timer counter provided in the main RAM 74. When the reach generation table is referred to, the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter C14 is selected regardless of the number of reserved information on the first normal drawing side, whereas the reach non-generation table is selected. When referred to, a shorter display duration is selected as the number of reserved information on the first table side increases. The update of the numerical information set in the first timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be selected when the hold information on the first normal drawing side triggers the start of the display continuation times is 1 second to 180 seconds.

When the process for specifying the display continuation period is executed in the first normal figure fluctuation start process, the command corresponding to the result of the first normal electric open lottery process and the determined display continuation period information is read from the main ROM 73. , Transmit to the sound light side MPU 92. The sound / light side MPU 92 executes control so that the effect of continuous display rotation corresponding to the received command is executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. In addition, in the symbol display device 51, as the effect for continuous display, the same effect as the effect for game times in the first embodiment is executed.

In the first normal figure fluctuation start process, after the above command is transmitted, the change display of the pattern on the first normal figure display unit 131 is started. A variable display table for normal drawings is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as a table referred to by the main MPU 72 when the first normal drawing display unit 131 causes the variable display of the pattern to be displayed. When the variable display of the pattern is executed in the first general drawing display unit 131, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the first general electric opening lottery process. When the first normal figure display unit 131 performs the variable display of the pattern, the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the normal figure shows the variation of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. The control data for one lap in the display is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the first normal map display unit 131, the variable display table for the normal map is repeatedly used until immediately before the final display is performed. It should be noted that the same variable display table for normal figures is also used when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the second normal figure display unit 132, the third normal figure display unit 133, and the fourth normal figure display unit 134.

After starting the variable display of the pattern on the first normal figure display unit 131, the value of the first normal figure normal electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the 1st normal power counter is "0" when the 1st normal power fluctuation start processing is executed, the value of the 1st normal power counter becomes the 1st normal power by adding 1. It becomes "1" corresponding to the processing during fluctuation (step S1112).

In the first processing during the fluctuation of the normal figure in step S1112, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the display continuation rotation and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the first timer counter measuring the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. Before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the first normal figure display unit 131 is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final display. In addition, this regular change is made in a certain manner regardless of whether or not the first public train is won. In addition, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the first normal figure display unit 131 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the first normal electric opening lottery process. In addition, a confirmation display command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92. When the sound / light side MPU 92 receives the confirmation display command, the sound / light side MPU 92 displays the final stop display of the combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed this time in the symbol display device 51. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the 1st normal drawing counter, the value of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the 1st normal figure changing process to the 1st normal figure finalizing process (step S1113). Update to.

In the first process during the determination of the normal figure in step S1113, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display period (specifically, 0.4 seconds) of the current display continuation times has elapsed. When the fixed display period has passed, it is determined whether or not the result of the first public power opening lottery process in the current display continuation time is the first public power opening winning. If the first normal power opening is not won, the process of confirming the first normal power is terminated after the value of the first normal power counter is cleared to "0". When the first general electric power opening is won, "3" is set as the information of the number of times of opening and closing of the first general electric power device 121 in the first general electric power opening counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "10" is set in the first general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 as information on the maximum number of winnings to the first general electric device 121 in the open execution state this time. In addition, information corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first timer counter as information on the open duration of the first general electric device 121. Further, by starting the output of the drive signal to the first general electric drive unit 121b, the first general electric device 121 is opened. After that, the 1st Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1. In this case, since the value of the first normal power counter is "2" when the first normal power determination processing is executed, it corresponds to the first normal power open processing (step S1114) after 1 addition. It becomes "3" to do.

In the process of opening the first normal power in step S1114, when a prize is generated in the first general power device 121, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the first general power winning counter of the main RAM 74. To do. Then, when the value of the first normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the first normal power release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the first timer counter is cleared to "0", and the first 1 By stopping the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 121b, the first general electric accessory 121a is closed and the value of the first general electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the first normal figure normal electric control process becomes the first normal figure fluctuation start process (step S1111). Further, even if the value of the first normal power winning counter is not "0", if the value of the first timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the first normal power drive unit 121b. By stopping the above, the first general electric accessory 121a is closed and the value of the first general electric release counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the first general electric opening counter is not "0", after setting the numerical information of the closing duration (specifically, 1 second) of the first general electric accessory 121a in the first timer counter. 1st Fuzu The value of the Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the first normal power control process becomes the first normal power closed process (step S1115). When the value of the first normal power release counter is "0", the value of the first normal power counter is cleared to "0" without setting the value in the first timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the first normal figure normal electric control process becomes the first normal figure fluctuation start process (step S1111).

In the process of closing the first normal power in step S1115, the output of the drive signal to the first normal power drive unit 121b is started on condition that the value of the first timer counter is "0". 1 Set the numerical information of the opening duration (specifically, 3 seconds) when the universal accessory 121a is opened and the first utility object 121a is opened once in the first timer counter. .. Then, the value of the first normal figure normal electric counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the first normal power control process becomes the first normal power open processing (step S1114).

As a result of the execution of the first normal drawing control process as described above, the pattern changes in the first normal drawing display unit 131 triggered by the occurrence of a prize in the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35. The display continuation times including the display are performed, and the symbol display device 51 performs a variable display of the symbol. Then, when the first normal power opening is won in the first normal power opening lottery process, the first normal power device 121 is set after the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 and the symbol display device 51 are completed. It will be in the open execution state. In the open execution state, the first general electric device 121 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the first general electric device 121 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated. Further, when the game ball wins the first general electric device 121, the second general drawing side holding information is stored in the second general drawing holding area 142 up to a maximum of four pieces.

In the first normal power control process, when the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, a positive determination is made in step S1104, so that step S1116 Executes the fluctuation stop processing at. In the fluctuation stop processing, if the current state is that the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 and the symbol display device 51 are being executed, the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 are set to the current first normal figure display unit. The update of the first timer counter is temporarily stopped while being temporarily stopped in the state of the display mode of 131, and the stopped command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92. By receiving the stopped command, the sound / light side MPU 92 continues the effect of the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 as it is, while receiving the stopped command and then the stop release command described later. The period for displaying the final stop display of the symbol combination will be extended by the period until this is displayed. Further, in the variable stop processing, "1" is set in the first stop flag provided in the main RAM 74.

In the first normal diagram normal electric control process, when a negative determination is made in step S1104 and "1" is set in the first stop flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1105: YES), the first 1 Clear the stopped flag to "0" (step S1106). As a result, when the first normal figure display unit 131 is temporarily stopped in the middle of the display continuation times, the display continuation times are restarted and the update of the first timer counter is restarted. After that, a stop release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S1107). As a result, the period for extending the final stop display of the symbol combination in this display continuation time is grasped by the sound light side MPU 92.

As described above, in the first normal drawing control process, when the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state, or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the display continuation times of the first normal figure display unit 131 Executes the process for temporarily stopping. As a result, when the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the display continuation times of the first general drawing display unit 131 are prevented from proceeding. Is possible. Therefore, when the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the first general electric device 121 is not in the open execution state. It becomes possible to.

<2nd Fuden control process>
Next, the second normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the second normal drawing control process, the execution control of the continuous display times in the second normal drawing display unit 132 and the execution control of the open execution state of the second normal drawing device 122 are performed. FIG. 25 is a slow chart showing the second normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated in the first general electric device 121 (step S1201: YES), the second general drawing side hold stored in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d of the second general drawing holding area 142. On condition that the number of pieces of information is less than four, which is the upper limit (step S1202: NO), the storage process in the second general drawing holding area 142 is executed (step S1203). In the storage process, the numerical information of the normal number counter C11 is stored as the second normal figure side hold information, and the second normal figure side hold information in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d of the second normal figure hold area 142 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. When the second normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display contents of the second normal figure hold display unit 136 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the second normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S1201, an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, or the process of step S1203 is executed, whether or not the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state, or a special winning device It is determined whether or not 35 is in the acceptance execution state (step S1204). If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the processes of step S1205 and step S1206 are executed. These processes will be described later. After that, the second general-purpose electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read out (step S1207). In the second Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the second Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The second normal power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the second normal power control process on the main MPU 72.

The second normal figure normal electric counter can take the value of "0" to "4", and each value of "0" to "4" is the start address NA20 to NA24 of each process (step S120-10, S1214). It corresponds to. Specifically, when the value of the second normal figure counter is "0", the second normal figure fluctuation start process (2nd normal figure fluctuation start process) is a process for starting the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132. Step S1210) is the execution target, and when the value of the second normal figure counter is "1", the second normal figure change is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132. When the intermediate process (step S1211) is the execution target and the value of the second normal figure counter is "2", the second process is for ending the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132. The process during determination of the normal figure (step S1212) is the execution target, and when the value of the second normal figure counter is "3", it is a process for controlling the open state of the second normal electric device 122. 2 The process during opening of the normal power (step S1213) is the execution target, and when the value of the normal power counter in the second normal figure is "4", it is a process for reopening the second normal power device 122. The second normal electric power closing process (step S1214) is the execution target.

In the second Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the second Fuzu Fuden address table (step S1207), the start address corresponding to the information of the second Fuzu Fuden counter is set to the second Fuzu Fuden address. It is acquired from the table (step S1208) and jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1209). Hereinafter, each process of steps S121-10 to S1214 will be described individually.

In the second normal figure fluctuation start process of step S1210, the second normal figure holding area 142 is held and stored on the condition that the second normal figure side holding information is held and stored in the second normal figure holding area 142. Executes the process of shifting the pending information on the second normal map side. Specifically, the second normal map side hold information stored in the first area 142a of the second normal figure hold area 142 is shifted to the second normal figure execution area 142e, and then the second area 142b → second. The second normal drawing side hold information is shifted so that 1 area 142a, 3rd area 142c → 2nd area 142b, and 4th area 142d → 3rd area 142c. When the second normal figure side hold information is shifted, the display contents of the second normal figure hold display unit 136 are updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of the second normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

In the second normal map fluctuation start process, after the above shift process is executed, the second normal map side hold information newly shifted to the second normal map execution area 142e is used as the lottery value for the second normal figure open lottery process. To execute. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the second public power opening in the second public power opening lottery process is constant regardless of the gaming state, and specifically, the probability of winning the second public power is 99/100. It will be an open win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the second public train opening may be higher or lower than this. Further, if the second normal drawing side hold information is acquired without executing the second normal power opening lottery process, the opening execution state of the second normal power device 122 may be surely generated.

In the second normal figure fluctuation start process, when the second normal electric open lottery process is executed, a process for specifying the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is executed. In the specific processing, a fixed display duration of 0.2 seconds is set to the second timer counter provided in the main RAM 74 regardless of the result of the second normal power opening lottery processing and the number of the second normal drawing side reserved information. set. When the display continuous times are executed by the second normal figure display unit 132, the corresponding effects are not executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. After the first normal electric device 121 is in the open execution state, all of the second normal drawing side hold information acquired by the open execution state is digested, and the second normal drawing side hold information is triggered. Until all the open execution states of the second general electric device 122 are completed, it corresponds to the jackpot state of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, and in the jackpot state, the effect corresponding to the jackpot state is the symbol display device 51. , Is executed by the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

In the second normal figure fluctuation start process, after executing a process for specifying the display continuation period, the change display of the pattern on the second normal figure display unit 132 is started. When the second normal figure display unit 132 causes the variable display of the pattern to be performed, the variable display table for the normal figure already described is referred to. After starting the variable display of the pattern on the second normal figure display unit 132, the value of the second normal figure counter is added by one. Since the value of the 2nd normal power counter is "0" when the 2nd normal power fluctuation start processing is executed, the value of the 2nd normal power counter becomes the 2nd normal power by adding 1. It becomes "1" corresponding to the processing during fluctuation (step S1211).

In the second processing during the fluctuation of the normal diagram in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the display continuation rotation and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the second timer counter measuring the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is 0.1 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. Before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the second normal figure display unit 132 is executed. In addition, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the second normal figure display unit 132 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the second normal power opening lottery process this time. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the 2nd normal figure counter, the value of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the process during the change of the 2nd normal figure to the one corresponding to the process during the determination of the 2nd normal figure (step S1212). Update to.

In the second normal drawing finalizing process in step S1212, it is determined whether or not the finalized display period (specifically, 0.1 seconds) of the current display continuation times has elapsed. When the fixed display period has passed, it is determined whether or not the result of the second public power opening lottery process in the current display continuation time is the second public power opening winning. If the second normal train is not won, the process of confirming the second normal train is terminated after the value of the second normal train counter is cleared to "0". When the second normal power opening is won, "3" is set as information on the number of times of opening and closing of the second normal power device 122 in the second normal power opening counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "10" is set in the second general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 as information on the maximum number of winnings to the second general electric device 122 in the open execution state this time. In addition, information corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the second timer counter as information on the open duration of the second general electric device 122. Further, the second general electric device 122 is opened by starting the output of the drive signal to the second general electric drive unit 122b. After that, the second normal figure general electric counter is added by one. Since the value of the second normal figure counter is "2" when the second normal figure finalizing process is executed, "3" corresponding to the second normal figure open process (step S1213) after 1 addition. ".

In the process of opening the second normal power in step S1213, when a prize is generated in the second general power device 122, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the second general power winning counter of the main RAM 74. To do. Then, when the value of the second normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the second normal power release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the second timer counter is cleared to "0", and the second is further. 2 By stopping the output of the drive signal to the normal electric drive unit 122b, the second general electric accessory 122a is closed and the value of the second general electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the second normal figure normal electric control process becomes the second normal figure fluctuation start process (step S1210). Further, even if the value of the second normal power winning counter is not "0", if the value of the second timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the second normal power drive unit 122b. By stopping, the second general electric accessory 122a is closed and the value of the second general electric release counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the second normal electric opening counter is not "0", after setting the numerical information of the closing duration (specifically, 1 second) of the second general electric accessory 122a in the second timer counter. 2nd Fuzu The value of the Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the second normal power control process becomes the second normal power closing process (step S1214). When the value of the second normal power release counter is "0", the value of the second normal power counter is cleared to "0" without setting the value in the second timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the second normal figure normal electric control process becomes the second normal figure fluctuation start process (step S1210).

In the second normal power closing process in step S1214, the output of the drive signal to the second normal power drive unit 122b is started on condition that the value of the second timer counter is "0". 2 Set the numerical information of the opening duration (specifically, 3 seconds) when the general electric accessory 122a is in the open state and the second general electric accessory 122a is in the open state once in the second timer counter. .. Then, the value of the second normal figure normal electric counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the second normal power control process becomes the second normal power open processing (step S1213).

By executing the second normal power control process as described above, the second normal power display unit 132 performs variable display of the pattern when a prize is generated in the first normal power device 121. .. Then, when the second normal power opening is won in the second normal power opening lottery process, the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state after the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132 are completed. .. In the open execution state, the second general electric device 122 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the second electric device 122 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated.

In the second normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121 is in the open execution state or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, a positive determination is made in step S1204, so that step S1215 Executes the fluctuation stop processing at. In the fluctuation stop processing, if the current display continuation time in the second normal figure display unit 132 is being executed, the display continuation time in the second normal figure display unit 132 is set to the display mode of the current display mode of the second normal figure display unit 132. The update of the second timer counter is temporarily stopped while being temporarily stopped in the state. Further, in the variable stop processing, "1" is set in the second stop flag provided in the main RAM 74.

In the second normal diagram normal power control process, when a negative determination is made in step S1204 and "1" is set in the second stop flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1205: YES), the second 2 Clear the stopped flag to "0" (step S1206). As a result, when the second normal figure display unit 132 is temporarily stopped in the middle of the display continuation times, the display continuation times are restarted and the update of the second timer counter is restarted.

As described above, in the second normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121 is in the open execution state, or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the display continuation times of the second normal figure display unit 132 are performed. Executes the process for temporarily stopping. As a result, when the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the display continuation times of the second general drawing display unit 132 are prevented from proceeding. Is possible. Therefore, when the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state, or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the second general electric device 122 is not in the open execution state. It becomes possible to.

<Third general drawing control processing>
Next, the third normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the third normal drawing control process, the execution control of the continuous display times in the third normal drawing display unit 133 and the execution control of the open execution state of the third normal drawing device 123 are performed. FIG. 26 is a slow chart showing the third normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated for the specific operating unit 124 (step S1301: YES), the third normal figure side hold information stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third normal figure hold area 143. On condition that the number is less than 4, which is the upper limit number (step S1302: NO), the storage process in the third normal figure holding area 143 is executed (step S1303). In the storage process, the numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C11 is stored as the third normal figure side hold information, and the third normal figure side hold information in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third normal figure hold area 143 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that are not. When the third normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display content of the third normal figure hold display unit 137 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the third normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, or the process of step S1303 is executed, the third normal-figure address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read (step). S1304). In the third Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the third Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The third normal power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the third normal power control process by the main MPU 72.

The third normal figure normal electric counter can take the value of "0" to "3", and each value of "0" to "3" is the start address NA30 to NA33 of each process (step S1307 to step S1310). It corresponds to. Specifically, when the value of the third normal figure counter is "0", the third normal figure fluctuation start process (3rd normal figure fluctuation start process), which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 ( Step S1307) is the execution target, and when the value of the third normal figure counter is "1", the third normal figure change is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133. When the middle process (step S1308) is the execution target and the value of the third normal figure counter is "2", the third process is for ending the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133. The process during determination of the normal figure (step S1309) is the execution target, and when the value of the third normal figure counter is "3", it is a process for controlling the open state of the third normal electric device 123. 3 The processing during opening of the normal power (step S1310) is the execution target.

In the third Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the third Fuzu Fuden address table (step S1304), the start address corresponding to the information of the third Fuzu Fuden counter is set to the third Fuzu Fuden address. It is acquired from the table (step S1305) and jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1306). Hereinafter, each process of steps S1307 to S1310 will be described individually.

In the third normal figure fluctuation start process of step S1307, the hold information on the third normal figure side is held and stored in the third normal figure holding area 143 on the condition that the reserved information on the third normal figure side is held and stored in the third normal figure holding area 143. The process of shifting the held information on the third normal map side is executed. Specifically, the third normal map side hold information stored in the first area 143a of the third normal figure hold area 143 is shifted to the third normal figure execution area 143e, and then the second area 143b → the second. The third area reserved information is shifted so that 1 area 143a, 3rd area 143c → 2nd area 143b, and 4th area 143d → 3rd area 143c. When the third normal figure side hold information is shifted, the display content of the third normal figure hold display unit 137 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of the third normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

In the third normal map fluctuation start process, after the above shift process is executed, the third normal map side reserved information newly shifted to the third normal map execution area 143e is used as the lottery value for the third normal map open lottery process. To execute. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the 3rd public power opening in the 3rd public power opening lottery process is constant regardless of the gaming state, and specifically, the probability of winning the 3rd public power is 1/100. It will be an open win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the third public train opening may be higher or lower than this.

In the third normal figure fluctuation start process, when the third normal electric open lottery process is executed, a process for specifying the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is executed. In the specific process, a fixed display duration of 300 seconds is set in the third timer counter provided in the main RAM 74 regardless of the result of the third normal power open lottery process and the number of reserved information on the third normal drawing side. .. When the display continuation times are executed by the third normal figure display unit 133, the corresponding effects are not executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64.

In the third normal figure fluctuation start process, after executing the process for specifying the display continuation period, the change display of the pattern on the third normal figure display unit 133 is started. When the third normal figure display unit 133 causes the variable display of the pattern to be performed, the variable display table for the normal figure already described is referred to. After starting the variable display of the pattern on the third normal figure display unit 133, the value of the third normal figure normal electric counter is added by one. Since the value of the 3rd normal power counter is "0" when the 3rd normal power fluctuation start processing is executed, the value of the 3rd normal power counter becomes the 3rd normal power by adding 1. It becomes "1" corresponding to the processing during fluctuation (step S1308).

In the process during the change of the third normal figure in step S1308, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the continuous display rotation and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the third timer counter measuring the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. If it is before the final display, the process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern in the third general drawing display unit 133 is executed. In addition, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the third normal figure display unit 133 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the third normal electric opening lottery process this time. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the 3rd normal drawing counter, the value of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the processing during the change of the 3rd normal figure to the processing during the determination of the 3rd normal figure (step S1309). Update to.

In the process during the determination of the third normal figure in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display period (specifically, 0.4 seconds) of the current display continuation times has elapsed. When the fixed display period has passed, it is determined whether or not the result of the third public power opening lottery process in this display continuation time is the third public power opening winning. If the third normal train is not won, the process of confirming the third normal train is terminated after the value of the third normal train counter is cleared to "0". When the third general electric power opening is won, "1" is set as the information of the number of times of opening and closing of the third general electric power device 123 in the third general electric power opening counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "10" is set in the third general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 as information on the maximum number of winnings to the third general electric device 123 in the open execution state this time. In addition, information corresponding to 1 second is set in the third timer counter as information on the open duration of the third general electric device 123. Further, by starting the output of the drive signal to the third general electric drive unit 123b, the third general electric device 123 is opened. After that, the third normal figure normal electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the 3rd normal power counter is "2" when the 3rd normal power determination processing is executed, "3" corresponding to the 3rd normal power open processing (step S1310) after 1 addition. ".

In the process of opening the third normal power in step S1310, when a prize is generated in the third general power device 123, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the third general power winning counter of the main RAM 74. To do. Then, when the value of the third normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the third normal power release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the third timer counter is cleared to "0", and the third is further. By stopping the output of the drive signal to the 3 normal electric drive unit 123b, the 3rd general electric accessory 123a is closed and the value of the 3rd general electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third normal figure normal electric control process becomes the third normal figure change start process (step S1307). Further, even if the value of the third general-purpose winning counter is not "0", if the value of the third timer counter is "0", the third general-purpose winning counter and the third general-purpose winning counter of the main RAM 74 By clearing the value of the general electric power opening counter to "0" and further stopping the output of the drive signal to the third general electric power driving unit 123b, the third general electric power accessory 123a is closed. Then, the value of the third normal figure normal electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third normal figure normal electric control process becomes the third normal figure change start process (step S1307).

As described above, when the third normal drawing control process is executed, the pattern is variablely displayed on the third normal drawing display unit 133, triggered by the occurrence of a prize in the specific operating unit 124. Then, in the case where the third normal power opening is won in the third normal power opening lottery process, the third normal power device 123 is in the open execution state after the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 are completed. .. In the open execution state, the open state for 1 second is performed once by the third general electric device 123. Since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, the upper limit number of game balls will not win the third general electric device 123 in the open state of 1 second.

Here, in the third normal power control process, the first normal power device 121 is in the open execution state, the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state, and the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state. In any case, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation times of the third normal figure display unit 133 is not executed. As a result, even if the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state, the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, that is Regardless of this, it is possible to advance the display continuation times of the third general diagram display unit 133, and it is possible to advance the open execution state in the third general electric device 123. Further, in the first normal power control process, even when the third normal power device 123 is in the open execution state, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation times of the first normal power display unit 131 is not executed. In the second normal power control process, even when the third normal power device 123 is in the open execution state, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation times of the second normal power display unit 132 is not executed. In the fourth normal power control process described later, even when the third normal power device 123 is in the open execution state, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation times of the fourth normal power display unit 134 is not executed. As a result, even when the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to advance the display continuation times of the first general drawing display unit 131 regardless of the open execution state, and the first general electric device It is possible to advance the open execution state in 121, and it is possible to advance the display continuation times of the second general diagram display unit 132 regardless of this, and to advance the open execution state in the second general electric device 122. It becomes possible to advance the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 regardless of this, and it is possible to advance the acceptance execution state in the special winning device 35.

<Fourth figure Fuden control process>
Next, the fourth normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the fourth normal drawing control process, the execution control of the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 and the execution control of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 are performed. FIG. 27 is a slow chart showing the fourth normal power control process.

It is determined whether or not the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state, or whether or not the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state (step S1401). If a negative determination is made in step S1401, the processes of steps S1402 and S1403 are executed. These processes will be described later. After that, the fourth normal figure general electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read (step S1404). In the 4th Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The fourth normal power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the fourth normal power control process on the main MPU 72.

The fourth normal figure normal electric counter can take the value of "0" to "3", and each value of "0" to "3" is the start address NA40 to NA43 of each process (step S1407 to step S1410). It corresponds to. Specifically, when the value of the 4th normal figure counter is "0", the 4th normal figure fluctuation start process (4th normal figure fluctuation start process) which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the 4th normal figure display unit 134 ( Step S1407) is the execution target, and when the value of the fourth normal figure counter is "1", the fourth normal figure change, which is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. When the intermediate process (step S1408) is the execution target and the value of the fourth normal figure counter is "2", the fourth process is for ending the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. When the process during confirmation of the normal figure (step S1409) is the execution target and the value of the fourth normal figure counter is "3", the fourth normal is a process for controlling the acceptance state of the special winning device 35. The process during power release (step S1410) is the execution target.

In the 4th Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the 4th Fuzu Fuden address table (step S1404), the start address corresponding to the information of the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is set to the 4th Fuzu Fuden address. It is acquired from the table (step S1405) and jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1406). Hereinafter, each process of steps S1407 to S1410 will be described individually.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the fourth normal diagram fluctuation start processing in step S1407. When a prize has been generated in the through winning unit 34 (step S1501: YES), the acceptance determination process is executed (step S1502). In the acceptance determination process, the numerical information of the current normal electric random number counter C11 is stored in the execution area 144 for the 4th normal drawing as the holding information on the 4th normal drawing side. Then, the acceptance determination table is read from the main ROM 73, and the read acceptance determination table is collated with the fourth ordinary figure side hold information stored in the fourth ordinary figure execution area 144. In this case, there is a 98% chance that the winning result will be accepted.

When the result of the acceptance determination process is the acceptance winning result (step S1503: YES), the stop result setting process for the acceptance winning result is executed (step S1504). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the acceptance winning result to be finally stopped and displayed in the current display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. .. It should be noted that one type of pattern stop mode may be set for the acceptance winning result, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for the acceptance winning result.

If the result of the acceptance determination process is not the acceptance winning result (step S1503: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S1505). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the disengagement result to be finally stopped and displayed on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 at the current display continuation time is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the acceptance winning result.

After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the specification process of the fourth normal figure fluctuation period is executed (step S1506). After that, the variable display of the pattern on the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 is started (step S1507). When the fourth normal figure display unit 134 causes the variable display of the pattern to be performed, the variable display table for the normal figure already described is referred to.

After that, the value of the 4th normal drawing counter is added by 1 (step S1508). Since the value of the 4th normal power counter is "0" when the 4th normal power fluctuation start processing is executed, the value of the 4th normal power counter becomes the 4th normal power by adding 1. It becomes "1" corresponding to the processing during fluctuation (step S1408).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the fourth normal figure fluctuation period in step S1506. First, it is determined whether or not one or more third normal drawing side reserved information is stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third normal drawing holding area 143 (step S1601).

If a negative determination is made in step S1601, a lottery process for selecting a period is executed (step S1602). In the lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is periodically (for example, 4 milliseconds cycle) updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in a period selection table stored in advance in the main ROM 73. Match against. The period selection table is set so that the selection winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/500. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the probability that the selection winning result will be 1/50 in the lottery process for period selection is 1/50. The configuration may be higher than that, and the probability of winning the selection in the lottery process for period selection is 1/100, which is the same as the probability of winning the first open lottery in the first open lottery process. It may be a certain configuration or a configuration that is substantially the same.

When the result of the lottery process for period selection is not the selection winning result but the out-of-selection result (step S1603: NO), the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S1604). Similar to the first embodiment, the first display duration is 0.45 seconds. In the situation where the first display continuation period is selected, as in the first embodiment, even if the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the special winning device 35 is basically not awarded.

On the other hand, when one or more of the third normal drawing side hold information is stored and an affirmative judgment is made in step S1601, or the result of the lottery process for period selection is the selection winning result and the affirmative judgment is made in step S1603. In this case, the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S1605). Similar to the first embodiment, the third display duration is 1 second. In the situation where the third display continuation period is selected, as in the first embodiment, the special winning device 35 is one of the 11 game balls that reach the position where the special winning device 35 can be won. Can be expected to win a prize.

When any of the processes of step S1604 and step S1605 is executed, the information of the display duration selected in either step S1604 or step S1605 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1606). The update of the numerical information set in the fourth timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

With the above configuration, in the situation where the hold information on the third normal figure side is held and stored, the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. It is possible that a prize will be given to the special prize device 35. As a result, the player who expects the special winning device 35 to win a prize pays attention to whether or not the game ball wins the specific operating unit 124, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third display continuation time is not selected in the display continuation time in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 just by executing the display continuation time in the third normal figure display unit 133, and the display continuation time in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is not selected. In order for the third display continuation time to be selected in the time, it is necessary to further hold and store the third display side hold information. As a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty level for selecting the third display continuation time in the display continuation time in the fourth normal figure display unit 134, and from this point as well, the game ball is placed in the specific operation unit 124. Attention to whether or not to win a prize will be increased, and as a result, it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even in a situation where the hold information on the third normal figure side is not stored on hold, the selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for period selection, so that the display continuation period in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is displayed continuously. Is selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134.

In the process of changing the fourth normal figure in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the continuous display rotation and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the fourth timer counter measuring the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. Before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is executed. Further, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the acceptance determination process this time. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the 4th normal drawing counter, the value of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the 4th normal figure changing process to the 4th normal figure finalizing process (step S1409). Update to.

In the process during the finalization of the fourth normal figure in step S1409, it is determined whether or not the finalized display period (specifically, 0.4 seconds) of the current display continuation times has elapsed. When the confirmed display period has passed, it is determined whether or not the result of the acceptance determination process in the current display continuation time is the acceptance winning result. If it is not the result of winning the acceptance, after clearing the value of the 4th normal drawing counter to "0", the process of confirming the 4th normal figure is terminated. In the case of the acceptance winning result, "1" is set as the information of the number of times of opening and closing of the special winning device 35 in the fourth general electric opening counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "10" is set as information on the maximum number of winnings to the special winning device 35 in the current acceptance execution state in the fourth general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 74. In addition, information corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set in the fourth timer counter as information on the opening duration of the special winning device 35. Further, by starting the output of the drive signal to the open / close drive unit 47, the special winning device 35 is put into the receiving state. After that, the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1. Since the value of the 4th normal power counter is "2" when the 4th normal power determination processing is executed, "3" corresponding to the 4th normal power open processing (step S1410) after 1 addition. ".

In the process of opening the fourth normal power in step S1410, when a prize is generated in the special winning device 35, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the fourth general power winning counter of the main RAM 74. Then, when the value of the 4th normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the 4th normal power release counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the drive signal is output to the open / close drive unit 47. By stopping, the special winning device 35 is put into a non-accepting state. Then, the value of the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth normal figure normal electric control process becomes the fourth normal figure fluctuation start process (step S1407). Further, even if the value of the 4th general power winning counter is not "0", if the value of the 4th timer counter of the main RAM 74 is "0", the 4th general power winning of the main RAM 74 By clearing the values of the counter and the fourth normal power opening counter to "0" and further stopping the output of the drive signal to the open / close drive unit 47, the special winning device 35 is put into the non-accepting state. Then, the value of the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth normal figure normal electric control process becomes the fourth normal figure fluctuation start process (step S1407).

As described above, when the fourth normal drawing control process is executed, the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 performs a variable display of the pattern, triggered by the occurrence of a prize in the through winning unit 34. Then, when the acceptance winning result is obtained in the acceptance determination process, the special winning device 35 is put into the acceptance execution state after the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are completed. In the acceptance execution state, the special winning device 35 performs the acceptance state for 0.1 seconds once.

In the fourth normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121 is in the open execution state or the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. In step S1411, the fluctuation stop process is executed. In the fluctuation stop processing, if the current display continuation time on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is being executed, the display continuation time on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is set to the display mode of the current display mode of the fourth normal figure display unit 134. In this state, the update of the fourth timer counter is temporarily stopped as well as temporarily stopped. Further, in the variable stop processing, "1" is set in the fourth stop flag provided in the main RAM 74.

In the fourth normal diagram normal electric control process, when a negative determination is made in step S1401 and "1" is set in the fourth stopped flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1402: YES), the first 4 Clear the stopped flag to "0" (step S1403). As a result, when the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is temporarily stopped in the middle of the display continuation times, the display continuation times are restarted and the update of the fourth timer counter is restarted.

As described above, in the fourth normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121 is in the open execution state, or when the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state, the display of the fourth normal power display unit 134 is displayed. Executes the process for temporarily stopping the continuous times. As a result, when the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, the display continuation times of the fourth general drawing display unit 134 are prevented from proceeding. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, when the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, the special winning device 35 is not in the acceptance execution state. It becomes possible to.

<Relationship between the display duration of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 and the acceptance state of the special winning device 35>
Next, the relationship between the display duration of the fourth general drawing display unit 134 and the acceptance state of the special winning device 35 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 30 (a) shows the period during which the game ball is detected by the specific detection sensor 124a of the specific operating unit 124, and FIG. 30 (b) shows the period during which the display continuous times are executed on the third normal figure display unit 133. 30 (c) shows the period during which the game ball is passing through the through winning unit 34, and FIG. 30 (d) shows the game ball at a position where the special winning device 35 can be won. FIG. 30 (e) shows the period during which the display continuation times are executed on the fourth normal figure display unit 134, and FIG. 30 (f) shows the period during which the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state. Shown.

As described above, the game ball that has reached the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper region PA1 can enter the introduction port 126 that allows the game ball to flow toward the specific operating unit 124, and is introduced. If the ball does not enter the mouth 126, it flows into the left region PA2. Then, all the game balls flowing into the left side region PA2 will win the through winning section 34. Further, the game ball flowing into the left side region PA2 can win a prize in the first operating unit 32. Therefore, in a situation where either the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 is not in the open state, basically, in the upper region PA1, the variable display unit 37 is directed from the right side toward the left end region PA2. The firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down. Then, in the situation where the firing operation is performed in this way, in FIG. 30 (c), the timing of t1, the timing of t6, the timing of t12, the timing of t16, the timing of t19, the timing of t23, the timing of t28, and so on. As shown at the timing of t32, a prize is basically generated in the through winning unit 34, and as shown in the timing of t7 and the timing of t13 in FIG. 30 (a), a prize is generated in the specific operating unit 124 with a low probability. To do.

Based on the occurrence of a prize in the through winning section 34, the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the timing of t6 to the timing of t8, the timing of t12 to the timing of t14, the timing of t16 to the timing of t20, the timing of t23 to t29. In each period from the timing of t32 and the timing of t32 to t35, the display continuation times in the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 are performed as shown in FIG. 30 (e). Then, following the display continuation times, the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t20 to the timing of t22, the timing of t29 to the timing of t31. And, in each period from the timing of t35 to the timing of t36, the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state as shown in FIG. 30 (f).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), a prize is generated in the specific operating unit 124 at the timing of t7, and as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the third normal drawing display unit is generated at the timing of t7. The display continuation times in 133 are started. Then, as shown in FIG. 30A, the winning of the specific operating unit 124 is generated again at the timing of t13 in the situation where the display continuation time is being executed. When a prize is generated in the specific operating unit 124, the hold information on the third normal drawing side is put on hold and stored. After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the display continuation times in the third general drawing display unit 133 are completed at the timing of t25, and the opening execution state of the third general electric device 123 is immediately performed although not shown. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), a new display continuation time in the third normal drawing display unit 133 is started at the timing of t27, which is the timing after the open execution state is completed. In this case, the state in which the third normal drawing side hold information is held and stored is released.

When the game is played as described above, the third normal drawing side hold information is held and stored from the timing of t13 to the timing of t27. Therefore, the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 in each period of the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the timing of t6 to the timing of t8, the timing of t12 to the timing of t14, and the timing of t32 to the timing of t35 are While the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period, the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 in each period from the timing of t16 to the timing of t20 and the timing of t23 to the timing of t29 are The third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period. Then, as shown in FIG. 30 (d), the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, the timing of t17 to the timing of t18, the timing of t20 to the timing of t21, the timing of t24 to the timing of t26. , T29 timing to t30 timing and t33 timing to t34 timing, respectively, the game ball will reach the position where it is possible to win the special prize device 35. The timing of t20 to the timing of t21 and the timing of t29 to the timing of t30 included in the execution period of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 immediately after the display continuation time, which is the third display continuation period, is executed in the figure display unit 134. The game ball that reaches the position where the special winning device 35 can be won wins the special winning device 35, and the other game balls do not win the special winning device 35.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to or in place of the effects described in the first embodiment.

When a prize is won in the through winning unit 34, the holding information on the fourth normal drawing side is acquired, and when the holding information on the fourth normal drawing side is acquired, the display continuation times of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 are performed. However, in a configuration in which the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 can be performed after the end of the display continuation times, the acquisition is based on the winning of the specific operating unit 124 that does not directly contribute to the occurrence of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35. The third display continuation period is set when the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are executed in the situation where the hold information on the third normal figure side is held and stored, and the hold information on the third normal figure side is set. The first display continuation period is set when the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are executed in the situation where is not stored on hold. Then, when the first display continuation period is set, it is basically impossible to win the special prize device 35, and when the third display continuation period is set, the special prize device 35 is given a predetermined frequency. Will be awarded. As a result, the player who expects to win the special winning device 35 pays attention not only to the through winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 but also to the specific operating section 124, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In order to make the specific operating unit 124 win the game ball, it is necessary to perform a firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2, whereas the first electric device 121 and the first general electric device 121 which is in the open state in the jackpot state. The second general electric device 122 is provided in the right region PA3. As a result, when a jackpot state occurs in a situation where the third display continuation period is repeatedly set in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134, the jackpot state occurs. In parallel with this, the display continuation times of the third normal figure display unit 133 are exhausted, and the firing operation is performed aiming at the special electric winning device 36, so that the specific operating unit 124 is not won. During the jackpot state, the third normal drawing side hold information may not be held and stored. Therefore, it is possible to end the situation in which the third display continuation period is repeatedly set when the jackpot state occurs, and prevent the situation in which the third display continuation period is repeatedly set to continue excessively. It becomes possible.

When the third ordinary electric power opening lottery process is executed based on the acquisition of the third ordinary electric power holding information and the third ordinary electric power opening is won, the third ordinary electric power device 123 is in the open execution state. Then, when a prize is generated in the third general electric device 123, the game ball is paid out. On the other hand, when the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are executed in the situation where the hold information on the third normal figure side is held and stored as described above, the third display continuation period is set and the third display continuation period is set. When the display continuation period is set, the special winning device 35 is awarded at a predetermined frequency. That is, by storing the hold information on the third normal drawing side on hold, not only the benefit that the third normal electric device 123 is in the open execution state but also the benefit that the special winning device 35 is won at a predetermined frequency. Will also be granted. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the third general drawing side hold information is acquired, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the first public drawing side hold information is acquired based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning device 35, the first general public opening lottery process is executed, and when the first general public opening is won, the first 1 A jackpot state occurs in which the general electric device 121 and the second general electric device 122 are in the open execution state. As a result, it is expected that a prize will be generated in the special winning device 35, and as a result, the third display continuation period can be set in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a prize is generated for the specific operating unit 124. In addition, even when a prize is generated in the special winning device 35 in a configuration in which the first normal drawing side holding information is acquired based on the winning of the first operating unit 32, the first normal drawing side holding information is also obtained. Is obtained. As a result, the player who expects the occurrence of the jackpot state expects not only the winning of the first operating unit 32 but also the winning of the special winning device 35, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible to plan.

The first operating unit 32, the through winning unit 34, the special winning device 35, and the specific operating unit 124 are all provided at positions where the game ball can reach when the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side region PA2. ing. As a result, by performing a firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2, it is aimed to generate a prize for all of the first operating unit 32, the through winning unit 34, the special winning device 35, and the specific operating unit 124. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complicated firing operation.

If any of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs, the other state occurs among them. On the other hand, even if any of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 has occurred. An open execution state of the third general electric device 123 may occur. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which prizes are generated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first general electric device 121 is opened based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning device 35, and the second general electric device 122 is opened based on the occurrence of a prize in the first general electric device 121. In the configuration of the execution state, if any of the open execution state of the first general power device 121, the open execution state of the second general power device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 has occurred, they are generated. Other states do not occur. As a result, the player can gradually aim for winning the special winning device 35, the first general electric device 121, and the second general electric device 122. On the other hand, the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 occurs regardless of the winning of the special winning device 35, the first general electric device 121, and the second general electric device 122. In this case, even if any one of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs, the third An open execution state of the general electric device 123 may occur. As a result, for example, it is possible to create a situation in which it is possible to simultaneously aim for a prize in the special prize device 35 and a prize in the third general electric device 123.

In a configuration in which the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 and the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 can occur at the same time, the third general electric device 123 is a game ball so as to flow down toward the special winning device 35. It is provided at a position where a prize can be won when is flowing down. As a result, it is possible to perform the firing operation aiming at both the winning of the special winning device 35 and the winning of the third general electric device 123.

When any of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs, it corresponds to the other device among them. The display continuation times in the normal map display units 131, 132, and 134 are prevented from progressing. As a result, any one of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 is generated only by adjusting the progress of the display continuation times. If so, it is possible to prevent other states from occurring.

The state in which the display continuation times are not advanced as described above is displayed among the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35. It is released after the state corresponding to the normal map display units 131, 132, 134, which is not the target of continuous display continuation, is completed, and if the display continuation time is temporarily stopped in the middle, the display continuation time is displayed. Progress is resumed. This makes it possible to prevent the display continuation times that have been stopped from progress from being invalidated.

<Another form of the fourth embodiment>
(1) In the above configuration, when a jackpot state occurs in a situation where the upper limit number of 4 reserved information on the 3rd ordinary drawing side is stored, until the 3rd ordinary drawing side reserved information is not stored on hold. When the jackpot state occurs in the situation where the third general map side hold information is held and stored because the longest period required for the jackpot is longer than the shortest period required from the start to the end of the jackpot state. The configuration is such that the hold information on the third normal figure side can be held and stored even after the jackpot state ends, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the hold information on the third normal figure side is the maximum number of 4 The longest period required from the start to the end of the jackpot state is the shortest period required for the third normal drawing side hold information to become a situation where the hold information is not held and stored when a jackpot state occurs in the situation where the pieces are held and stored. It may be configured to have a shorter period than that. For example, the display continuation period of the display continuation times on the third normal figure display unit 133 may be set to 30 seconds instead of 300 seconds to improve the digestion efficiency of the reserved information on the third normal figure side, and when a big hit state occurs. The display continuation period of the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 may be shortened as compared with the case where the jackpot state is not obtained, and when the big hit state is reached, the third normal figure side hold information is displayed. The third normal figure holding area 143 may be configured to delete the holding information on the third normal figure side so that the situation is not stored on hold. As a result, when a big hit state occurs, it is possible to surely end the situation in which the third display continuation period is repeatedly set.

(2) The display continuation times of the third general drawing display unit 133 are not temporarily stopped even if the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, and further, the special winning device 35 Is not temporarily stopped even if it is in the acceptance execution state, but it is not limited to this, and the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the special prize When any of the acceptance execution states of the device 35 occurs, the display continuation times of the third normal figure display unit 133 are temporarily stopped, and when the event that triggered the stop is completed, the third normal figure display is displayed. The display continuation times of the unit 133 may be restarted. In this configuration, since the display continuation times of the third normal figure display unit 133 are temporarily stopped in the big hit state, the big hit state is started in the situation where the hold information on the third normal figure side is held and stored. In such a case, even after the jackpot state ends, the situation in which the third normal drawing side hold information is held and stored can be easily maintained. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to continue the situation in which the special winning device 35 is awarded at a predetermined frequency even after the end of the jackpot state.

(3) Even if the 4th ordinary drawing side holding information is acquired, the special winning device 35 is not in the acceptance execution state unless the acceptance winning result is obtained in the acceptance determination process, but the 4th ordinary drawing side holding information is The special winning device 35 may be configured to be in the acceptance execution state when it is acquired, and when the fourth general drawing side hold information is acquired, the special winning device 35 is accepted and executed with a probability of approximately 100%. It may be configured to be in a state.

(4) When any of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35, the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, and the open execution state of the second general electric device 122 occurs, the third general drawing display unit 133 The display continuation times may be terminated in the middle and invalidated as it is.

(5) The predetermined devices 35, 121, 122 that do not correspond to the normal map display units 131, 132, 134 enter the acceptance execution state or the open execution state during the continuous display rotation of the normal map display units 131, 132, 134. In this case, the display continuation times during the execution are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the predetermined devices 35, 121, 122 are in the accept execution state or the open execution state. The display continuation period of the display continuation times may be extended by the amount. In this case, in the period when the predetermined devices 35, 121, 122 are in the acceptance execution state or the open execution state, the fluctuation display of the pattern is displayed on the general map display units 131, 132, 134 corresponding to the display continuation times during execution. It may be a continuous configuration.

(6) A ball-entry device may be separately provided so that the game ball can be won when the second electric device 122 is won. The ball-entry device may be configured so that the game ball can be won by the electric drive unit being driven based on the winning of the second electric device 122. Further, in the ball-entry device, the game ball that has won the second general electric device 122 comes into contact with the mechanical operation mechanism to operate the operation mechanism, so that the game ball can be won. The game ball that has entered the device may come into contact with another mechanical operation mechanism to operate the operation mechanism, so that the game ball cannot be won. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of game balls given to the player in the jackpot state by executing the payout of the game balls based on the winning of the ball entry device.

(7) Although the configuration is such that the reserved information on the 4th ordinary drawing side is not stored on hold, the reserved information on the 4th ordinary drawing side may be stored on hold.

(8) The execution mode of the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 is arbitrary. For example, when the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the maximum number of the third general electric device 123 can be reached. The third general electric device 123 may be in an open state so that a winning of a game ball can be expected. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage that the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state.

(9) Limited to a configuration in which the third display continuation period is surely set when the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are started in the situation where the hold information on the third normal figure side is held and stored. It may be configured so that the third display continuation period can be easily set. Specifically, the display of the 4th normal figure display unit 134 is continued regardless of whether the 3rd normal figure side hold information is held and stored or the 3rd normal figure side hold information is held and stored. Although the third display duration can be set in the times, the situation in which the hold information on the third normal figure side is held and stored is better than the situation in which the hold information on the third normal figure side is not held and stored. The third display continuation period may be easily set in the display continuation times of the display unit 134.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the specific operating unit 124 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, the variable display unit 37 is provided with the specific operating portion 124 on the back wall 125 that defines the back side of the stage 37a, but in the present embodiment, the disk member 151 is provided on the stage 37a. A specific operating unit 124 is provided on the disk member 151 so that the game ball supplied to the disk member 151 can enter the ball. The disk member 151 will be described in detail. FIG. 31 is a plan view of the disk member 151.

The disk member 151 is provided on the stage 37a so that the upper surface of the disk member 151 can be seen by the player. The disk member 151 is provided with three holes that penetrate the disk member 151 in the vertical direction, one of which is a specific operating portion 124, and the remaining two holes are for discharge. The holes are 152 and 153. The specific operating portion 124 and the discharge holes 152 and 153 are provided in the circumferential direction at predetermined intervals, and the game ball supplied to the disc member 151 is discharged from the specific operating portion 124 on the upper surface of the disk member 151. The ball is inclined downward toward the specific operating portion 124 and the discharge hole portions 152 and 153 so as to enter the hole portions 152 and 153. The game ball that has entered the specific operating unit 124 is discharged to the back side of the game board 24 as it is, and the game ball that has entered the discharge holes 152 and 153 is discharged to the lower region PA4 of the lower region PA4. Continue the flow. The game ball that has entered the discharge holes 152 and 153 and has been discharged into the lower region PA4 can enter the first operating portion 32 provided in the lower region PA4.

The game ball that has entered the introduction port 126 of the variable display unit 37 and has passed through the warp passage 127 is supplied onto the disk member 151. Then, the game ball supplied on the disk member 151 enters the specific operating portion 124 with a probability of 1/3, and enters any of the discharge hole portions 152, 153 with a probability of 2/3.

According to the above configuration, the player who expects the game ball to enter the specific operating unit 124 is not only supplied with the game ball to the disk member 151, but also when the game ball is supplied to the disk member 151. It is expected that the game ball enters the specific operating unit 124. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the specific processing of the fourth normal figure fluctuation period executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the fourth normal figure fluctuation period in the present embodiment. First, whether or not one or more third normal figure side hold information is stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third normal figure hold area 143, or the display continuation times of the third normal figure display unit 133 is executed. It is determined whether or not it is inside (step S1701).

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, a lottery process for selecting a period is executed (step S1702). In the lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is periodically (for example, 4 milliseconds cycle) updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in a period selection table stored in advance in the main ROM 73. Match against. The period selection table is set so that the selection winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/500.

When the result of the lottery process for selecting the period is not the selection winning result but the wrong result (step S1703: NO), the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S1704). Similar to the first embodiment, the first display duration is 0.45 seconds. In the situation where the first display continuation period is selected, as in the first embodiment, even if the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the special winning device 35 is basically not awarded.

On the other hand, when one or more of the reserved information on the third normal figure side is stored, or when the display continuation times of the third normal figure display unit 133 are being executed and a positive judgment is made in step S1701, or a lottery for period selection When the result of the process is the selection winning result and an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S1705). Similar to the first embodiment, the third display duration is 1 second. In the situation where the third display continuation period is selected, as in the first embodiment, the special winning device 35 is one of the 11 game balls that reach the position where the special winning device 35 can be won. Can be expected to win a prize.

When any of the processes of step S1704 and step S1705 is executed, the information of the display duration selected in either step S1704 or step S1705 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1706).

According to the above configuration, not only when the third normal figure side hold information is held and stored, but also when the display continuation times are executed by the third normal figure display unit 133, the fourth normal figure display unit The third display continuation period is set at the display continuation times of 134. Then, when the third display continuation period is selected, a prize may be generated in the special prize device 35. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning a prize in the special winning device 35.

Further, when the display continuation time is executed on the third normal figure display unit 133, not only the third normal electric device 123 may be in the open execution state after that, but also the fourth normal figure display. By setting the third display continuation period in the display continuation times of the unit 134, the special prize device 35 can be won at a predetermined frequency. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's attention to the fact that the display continuation times are executed by the third normal figure display unit 133, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the third display continuation period is surely set when the display continuation time of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is started in the situation where the display continuation time of the third normal figure display unit 133 is executed. The configuration is not limited to, and the third display duration may be easily set. Specifically, regardless of whether the display continuation time of the third normal figure display unit 133 is not executed or the display continuation time of the third normal figure display unit 133 is executed, the fourth normal figure The third display continuation period can be set in the display continuation times of the display unit 134, but the situation in which the display continuation times of the third ordinary figure display unit 133 is executed is the display continuation times of the third ordinary figure display unit 133. The third display continuation period may be set more easily in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 than in the situation where is not executed.

Further, the process of step S1702 and step S1703 may not be executed in the specific process of the fourth normal figure fluctuation period. In this case, the display of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is limited to the case where one or more of the reserved information on the third normal figure side is stored or the display continuation times of the third normal figure display unit 133 is being executed. The third display continuation period is set in the continuation times.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the third normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the third normal power control process in the present embodiment. When a prize has been generated for the specific operating unit 124 (step S1801: YES), the third normal figure side hold information stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third normal figure hold area 143. On condition that the number is less than 4, which is the upper limit number (step S1802: NO), the storage process in the third normal figure holding area 143 is executed (step S1803). The processing content of the storage processing is the same as that of step S1303 of the third general-purpose electric control processing (FIG. 26) in the fourth embodiment.

When a negative determination is made in step S1801, an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, or the process of step S1803 is executed, whether or not the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state, the second general electric power It is determined whether or not the device 122 is in the open execution state, or whether or not the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state (step S1804). If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the processes of step S1805 and step S1806 are executed. These processes will be described later. After that, the processes of steps S1807 to S1813 are executed. The processing contents of steps S1807 to S1813 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1304 to S1310 of the third general electric power control process (FIG. 26) in the fourth embodiment.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, the fluctuation stop process is executed in step S1814. In the fluctuation stop processing, if the current display continuation time in the third normal figure display unit 133 is being executed, the display continuation time in the third normal figure display unit 133 is set to the display mode of the current display mode of the third normal figure display unit 133. The update of the third timer counter is temporarily stopped while being temporarily stopped in the state. Further, in the variable stop processing, "1" is set in the third stop flag provided in the main RAM 74.

After that, on the condition that the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state (step S1815: YES), the clearing process of the third general drawing holding area 143 is performed. Execute (step S1816). In the clearing process, "0" is cleared from the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third general drawing reservation area 143. As a result, even if the third ordinary drawing side reserved information is reserved and stored, the third ordinary drawing side reserved information is deleted and the reserved information is not stored. Further, in the clearing process, the execution area 143e for the third normal figure is cleared to "0" and the third normal figure normal electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the display continuation times are being executed in the third normal figure display unit 133, it is invalidated.

In the present embodiment, when the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the fluctuation stop processing (step S1116) is performed by making an affirmative determination in step S1104 in the first general electric power control process (FIG. 24). Is executed, and in the second normal power control process (FIG. 25), the fluctuation stop process (step S1215) is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S1204, and the fourth normal power control process (FIG. 27) is executed. Then, the fluctuation stop process (step S1411) is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S1401. Therefore, in the situation where the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 is not in the open execution state, and the special winning device 35 is in the open execution state. There is no such thing.

In the third normal diagram normal electric control process, when a negative determination is made in step S1804 and "1" is set in the third stopped flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1805: YES), the third 3 The stopped flag is cleared to "0" (step S1806). As a result, when the third normal figure display unit 133 is temporarily stopped in the middle of the display continuation times, the display continuation times are restarted and the update of the third timer counter is restarted.

According to the above configuration, when the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, even if the third general drawing side hold information is held and stored, it is deleted. As a result, when the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, the third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display unit 134. Can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the special winning device 35 can be won from being continued until after the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state. Become.

<8th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode of selecting the display continuation period of the third normal figure display unit 133 in the main MPU 72 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the identification process of the third normal figure fluctuation period executed by the main MPU 72. The process for specifying the third normal figure fluctuation period is executed in the third normal figure change start process in step S1307 in the third normal figure change control process (FIG. 26).

First, whether or not one or more second normal figure side hold information is stored in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d of the second normal figure hold area 142, or the display continuation times of the second normal figure display unit 132 is executed. It is determined whether or not it is inside (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, a long period of time is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 (step S1902). The long period is set to 300 seconds, which is the same as the display continuation period of the third normal figure display unit 133 in the fourth embodiment. Therefore, it can be expected that a further prize will be generated for the specific operating unit 124 in the continuous display times of the third normal figure display unit 133, and when the prize is generated, the hold information on the third normal figure side is reserved and stored. The third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, a short period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times in the third general drawing display unit 133 (step S1903). The short period is set to 0.5 seconds. In this case, since it is not expected that a further prize will be generated for the specific operating unit 124 when the display of the third normal drawing display unit 133 is continued, the holding information on the third normal drawing side is not stored on hold, and the fourth normal drawing side is not stored. The third display continuation period is not selected in the display continuation times of the figure display unit 134.

When any of the processes of step S1902 and step S1903 is executed, the information of the display duration selected in either step S1902 or step S1903 is set in the third timer counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1904). The update of the numerical information set in the third timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

According to the above configuration, when the first normal electric device 121 is in the open execution state and the second general drawing side hold information is acquired based on the winning of the first general electric device 121, the third normal drawing side hold information is obtained. Is not stored on hold. Then, when the hold information on the third normal figure side is not stored on hold, the third display continuation period is not selected in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134, so that the special winning device 35 is not won. Become. As a result, the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is prevented from continuing when the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the special winning device 35 can be won from being continued until after the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the specific processing of the fourth normal figure fluctuation period executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the identification process of the fourth normal figure fluctuation period in the present embodiment. First, it is determined whether or not one or more third normal drawing side reserved information is stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third normal drawing holding area 143 (step S2001). When a negative determination is made in step S2001, it is determined whether or not one or more fourth ordinary drawing side reserved information is stored in the first to fourth areas of the fourth ordinary drawing holding area (step S2002). ).

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the hold information on the fourth normal figure side is not stored on hold, but in the present embodiment, the display continuation times are executed in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. When a prize is awarded to the winning unit 34, the holding information on the fourth normal drawing side is acquired and stored on hold as a trigger of the winning. The maximum number of pieces to be stored on hold is set to 4, but the number is not limited to this, and may be 1, 2, or 3 or 5 or more.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, a lottery process for selecting a period is executed (step S2003). In the lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is periodically (for example, 4 milliseconds cycle) updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in a period selection table stored in advance in the main ROM 73. Match against. The period selection table is set so that the selection winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/500.

When the result of the lottery process for period selection is not the selection winning result but the out-of-selection result (step S2004: NO), the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S2005). Similar to the first embodiment, the first display duration is 0.45 seconds. In the situation where the first display continuation period is selected, as in the first embodiment, even if the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the special winning device 35 is basically not awarded.

On the other hand, when one or more of the third normal drawing side reserved information is stored and an affirmative judgment is made in step S2001, one or more of the fourth normal drawing side reserved information is stored and an affirmative judgment is made in step S2002. In this case, or when the result of the lottery process for period selection is the selection winning result and an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S2006). Similar to the first embodiment, the third display duration is 1 second. In the situation where the third display continuation period is selected, as in the first embodiment, the special winning device 35 is one of the 11 game balls that reach the position where the special winning device 35 can be won. Can be expected to win a prize.

When any of the processes of step S2005 and step S2006 is executed, the information of the display duration selected in either step S2005 or step S2006 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2007).

According to the above configuration, not only when the third normal figure side hold information is held and stored, but also when the fourth normal figure side hold information is held and stored, in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134. The third display duration is selected. Then, when the third display continuation period is selected, a prize can be generated in the special prize device 35. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning a prize in the special winning device 35.

In particular, when the third display continuation period is selected, a new prize is likely to occur in the through winning unit 34 in the situation where the display continuation time is executed in the fourth normal figure display unit 134, so that the fourth display unit 34 It becomes easier to continue the situation where the hold information on the normal map side is held and stored. That is, the third display continuation period is selected at the display continuation times of the fourth ordinary figure display unit 134 by holding and storing the third ordinary figure side hold information. Then, when the third display continuation period is selected, the hold information on the fourth normal figure side is easily stored on hold, and when the hold information on the fourth normal figure side is stored on hold, the hold information on the third normal figure side is stored. Even if it is not stored on hold, the third display continuation period is selected at the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected at the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment, and is executed when a prize is generated in the first operating unit 32 and when a prize is generated in the special winning device 35. The processing content is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left side area PA2, a right side area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by the variable display unit 37 as in the first embodiment. The lower region PA4 is provided with a first actuating portion 32 as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided in the left side region PA2, but in the present embodiment, these through winning units 34 and the special winning device 35 are not in the left side region PA2 but in the right side. It is provided in region PA3. Further, the right side region PA3 is provided with a first general electric device 121, a second general electric device 122, and a third general electric device 123. The configurations of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 are the same as those in the fourth embodiment.

In the right region PA3, the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 are provided side by side in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. In this case, the first general electric device 121 is arranged on the most upstream side, the second general electric device 122 is arranged below it, and the third general electric device 123 is arranged below it. In all of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123, when the corresponding general electric accessories 121a to 123a are in the closed state, the game ball cannot be won. When the corresponding general electric accessories 121a to 123a are opened, the game ball can be won. Then, the game ball that has won any of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged.

By winning the internal lottery executed based on the winning of the first operating unit 32, the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state, and the first general electric device 121 is in the open state. Further, by winning the internal lottery executed based on the winning of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state and the second general electric device 122 is in the open state. Further, by winning the internal lottery executed based on the winning of the second general electric device 122, the third general electric device 123 is opened and the third general electric device 123 is opened. Regardless of which of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123, the game ball enters, 15 games are played for each game ball. The ball is paid out.

In the right area PA3, a through winning unit 34 and a special winning device 35 are provided on the downstream side of the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123. A game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 between the third general electric device 123 and the through winning unit 34 and has not won any of the first general electric devices 121 to the third general electric device 123 An upper guide region 155 is formed to surely guide the through winning portion 34. The method of forming the upper guide region 155 is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the upper guide region 155 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b.

The through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 are arranged so as to be vertically separated from each other so that the through winning unit 34 faces upward. In this case, the vertical positional relationship between the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 is the above-mentioned first, except that the orientation of the special winning device 35 is opposite to the orientation in the first embodiment. It is the same as the embodiment. Further, in the area between the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35, the game ball winning the through winning unit 34 is surely placed in the entrance portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 or the opening / closing member 43 arranged at the non-accepting position. A lower guide region 156 for guiding is formed. The method of forming the lower guide region 156 is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the lower guide region 156 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b and by the upright wall 48 of the special winning device 35. By forming the lower guide area 156, if the opening / closing member 43 is arranged in the non-accepting position, the game ball winning the through winning portion 34 is surely arranged in the non-accepting position. If the opening / closing member 43 reaches the member 43 and the opening / closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position, the game ball that has won the through winning portion 34 surely enters the discharge passage 42.

Since the upper surface of the opening / closing member 43 and the ball receiving surface 44 are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left, the game balls placed on these surfaces flow down toward the left due to their own weight. It will be. In this case, the positional relationship of the special winning device 35 with respect to the first operating portion 32 is that the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 43 and the ball receiving surface 44 toward the left does not enter the first operating portion 32. It is set in a positional relationship that makes it difficult to enter the ball. Further, since the introduction port 37b that allows the game ball to flow into the stage 37a in the variable display unit 37 is provided only in the upper left portion of the variable display unit 37, the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right region PA3. When the operation is performed, the game ball is not supplied to the stage 37a through the introduction port 37b. Therefore, in order to generate a prize for the first operating unit 32, the game ball is not launched so as to flow down the right region PA3, but the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left region PA2. There is a need.

In the area on the lower right side of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass, the first normal figure display unit 131, the second normal figure display unit 132, the third normal figure display unit 133, the fourth normal figure display unit 134, and the first normal The figure hold display unit 135, the second normal figure hold display unit 136, and the third normal figure hold display unit 137 are provided. Each of the first normal figure display units 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible for the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 51, but the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure It is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the display unit 134. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the patterns displayed on the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters Is displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable. Further, the display range of the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Further, the display range for both the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 and the first normal figure hold display unit 135 to the third normal figure hold display unit 137 is also the display range of the symbol display device 51. The area is narrower than the display surface. As a result, the player's attention to the symbol display device 51 is higher than that of the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 and the first normal figure hold display unit 135 to the third normal figure hold display unit 137. It becomes possible to increase.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the first operating unit 32, the first normal drawing display unit 131 performs display continuation times including the variation display of the pattern. Further, the first normal figure holding display unit 135 is provided at a position adjacent to the first normal figure display unit 131. Up to four pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls winning in the first operating unit 32 are held as the first normal drawing side holding information, and the holding number is displayed by lighting the first normal drawing holding display unit 135. It has become like. As in the fourth embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the first normal drawing holding area 141 as an area for storing the first normal drawing side holding information.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the first general electric device 121, the display continuous times including the variable display of the pattern are performed in the second general drawing display unit 132. Further, the second normal figure holding display unit 136 is provided at a position adjacent to the second normal figure display unit 132. Up to four pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls winning in the first normal electric device 121 are held as the second normal figure side hold information, and the hold number is displayed by lighting the second normal figure hold display unit 136. It has become so. As in the fourth embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the second normal drawing holding area 142 as an area for storing the second normal drawing side holding information.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the second general electric device 122, the display continuous times including the variable display of the pattern are performed in the third general drawing display unit 133. Further, the third normal figure holding display unit 137 is provided at a position adjacent to the third normal figure display unit 133. Up to 4 pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls winning in the 2nd normal electric device 122 are held as the 3rd normal figure side hold information, and the hold number is displayed by lighting the 3rd normal figure hold display unit 137. It has become so. As in the fourth embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with a third normal drawing holding area 143 as an area for storing the third normal drawing side holding information.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the through winning unit 34, the display continuation time including the variation display of the pattern is performed in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. Here, the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is not provided with the normal figure hold display unit. That is, the fourth general drawing side hold information acquired when a prize is won in the through winning section 34 is not stored on hold. As in the fourth embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the fourth normal drawing execution area 144 as an area for storing the fourth normal drawing side holding information.

Here, the first display continuation period and the third display continuation period are set as the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. The first display duration is set to 0.45 seconds as in the first embodiment. Further, the third display continuation period is set to 1.5 seconds unlike the first embodiment. In this case, the positional relationship between the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 is such that when the first display continuation period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general drawing display unit 134, the special winning device 35 is awarded. Is impossible or difficult to occur, and when the third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display unit 134, the ratio of one of the two game balls that won the through winning unit 34. It is set to the positional relationship in which a prize is generated in the special prize device 35. When a prize is awarded to the special winning device 35, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball. As a result, when the third display continuation time is selected in the display continuation time of the fourth normal figure display unit 134, a larger number of game balls than the number of game balls supplied to the through winning unit 34 is played. It will be paid out to the person.

<1st Fuden control process>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the first normal figure normal electric control process for performing the execution control of the display continuous times in the first normal figure display unit 131 and the execution control of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121 will be described. FIG. 37 is a slow chart showing the first normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated for the first operating unit 32 (step S2101: YES), the first normal drawing side holding information stored in the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d of the first normal drawing holding area 141 On condition that the number of is less than 4, which is the upper limit number (step S2102: NO), the storage process in the first normal figure holding area 141 is executed (step S2103). In the storage process, the numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C11 is stored as the first general-purpose map side hold information, and the first general-purpose map side hold information in the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d of the first general figure hold area 141 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. When the first normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display contents of the first normal figure hold display unit 135 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the first normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S2101, an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, or the process of step S2103 is executed, is the second general electric device 122 or the third general electric device 123 in the open execution state? It is determined whether or not (step S2104). If a negative determination is made in step S2104, the processes of steps S2105-step S2115 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S2105 to S2115 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1105 to S1115 of the first general electric power control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, the process of step S2116 is executed. The processing content of step S2116 is the same as the processing content of step S1116 of the first normal power control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment.

By executing the first normal drawing control process as described above, the first normal drawing display unit 131 performs variable display of the pattern when a prize is generated in the first operating unit 32. The symbol display device 51 displays the fluctuation of the symbol. Then, when the first normal power opening is won in the first normal power opening lottery process, the first normal power device 121 is set after the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 and the symbol display device 51 are completed. It will be in the open execution state. In the open execution state, the first general electric device 121 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the first general electric device 121 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated. Further, when the game ball wins the first general electric device 121, the second general drawing side holding information is stored in the second general drawing holding area 142 up to a maximum of four pieces.

Further, in the first normal power control process, when the second normal power device 122 or the third normal power device 123 is in the open execution state, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation times of the first normal power display unit 131. To execute. As a result, when the second general electric device 122 or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the display continuation times of the first general drawing display unit 131 from proceeding. Therefore, when the second general electric device 122 or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the first general electric device 121 from being duplicated in the open execution state. Become.

<2nd Fuden control process>
Next, the second normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the second normal drawing control process, the execution control of the continuous display times in the second normal drawing display unit 132 and the execution control of the open execution state of the second normal drawing device 122 are performed. FIG. 38 is a slow chart showing the second normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated in the first general electric device 121 (step S2201: YES), the second general drawing side hold stored in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d of the second general drawing holding area 142. On condition that the number of pieces of information is less than four, which is the upper limit (step S2202: NO), the storage process in the second general drawing holding area 142 is executed (step S2203). In the storage process, the numerical information of the normal number counter C11 is stored as the second normal figure side hold information, and the second normal figure side hold information in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d of the second normal figure hold area 142 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. When the second normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display contents of the second normal figure hold display unit 136 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the second normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S2201, an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, or the process of step S2203 is executed, is the first general electric device 121 or the third general electric device 123 in the open execution state? It is determined whether or not (step S2204). If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the processes of steps S2205 to S2214 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S2205 to S2214 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1205 to S1214 of the second normal power control process (FIG. 25) in the fourth embodiment. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process of step S2215 is executed. The processing content of step S2215 is the same as the processing content of step S1215 of the second normal power control process (FIG. 25) in the fourth embodiment.

By executing the second normal power control process as described above, the second normal power display unit 132 performs variable display of the pattern when a prize is generated in the first normal power device 121. .. Then, when the second normal power opening is won in the second normal power opening lottery process, the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state after the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132 are completed. .. In the open execution state, the second general electric device 122 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the second electric device 122 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated. Further, when the game ball wins in the second normal electric device 122, the third normal figure side hold information is stored in the third normal figure hold area 143 up to four pieces.

Further, in the second normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121 or the third normal power device 123 is in the open execution state, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation times of the second normal power display unit 132. To execute. As a result, when the first general electric device 121 or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the display continuation times of the second general drawing display unit 132 from proceeding. Therefore, when the first general electric device 121 or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the second general electric device 122 from being duplicated in the open execution state. Become.

<Third general drawing control processing>
Next, the third normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the third normal drawing control process, the execution control of the continuous display times in the third normal drawing display unit 133 and the execution control of the open execution state of the third normal drawing device 123 are performed. FIG. 39 is a slow chart showing the third normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated in the second general electric device 122 (step S2301: YES), the third general drawing side hold stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third general drawing holding area 143. On condition that the number of pieces of information is less than four, which is the upper limit (step S2302: NO), the storage process in the third normal figure holding area 143 is executed (step S2303). In the storage process, the numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C11 is stored as the third normal figure side hold information, and the third normal figure side hold information in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third normal figure hold area 143 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that are not. When the third normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display content of the third normal figure hold display unit 137 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the third normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S2301, an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, or the process of step S2303 is executed, is the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 in the open execution state? Whether or not it is determined (step S2304). If a negative determination is made in step S2304, the processes of steps S2305 and S2306 are executed. These processes will be described later. After that, the third normal figure general electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read (step S2307). In the third Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the third Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The third normal power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the third normal power control process by the main MPU 72.

The third normal figure normal electric counter can take the value of "0" to "4", and each value of "0" to "4" is the start address NA30 to NA34 of each process (step S23110-step S2314). It corresponds to. Specifically, when the value of the third normal figure counter is "0", the third normal figure fluctuation start process (3rd normal figure fluctuation start process), which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 ( Step S2310) is the execution target, and when the value of the third normal figure counter is "1", the third normal figure change is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133. When the middle process (step S2311) is the execution target and the value of the third normal figure counter is "2", the third process is for ending the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133. The process during determination of the normal figure (step S2312) is the execution target, and when the value of the third normal figure counter is "3", it is a process for controlling the open state of the third normal electric device 123. 3 The process during opening of the normal power (step S2313) is the execution target, and when the value of the normal power counter in the third normal figure is "4", it is a process for reopening the third normal power device 123. The third normal electric power closing process (step S2314) is the execution target.

In the third Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the third Fuzu Fuden address table (step S2307), the start address corresponding to the information of the third Fuzu Fuden counter is set to the third Fuzu Fuden address. It is acquired from the table (step S2308) and jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S2309). Hereinafter, each process of steps S231 to S2314 will be described individually.

In the third normal figure fluctuation start process of step S2310, on the condition that the third normal figure side hold information is held and stored in the third normal figure holding area 143, it is held and stored in the third normal figure holding area 143. Executes the process of shifting the held information on the third normal map side. Specifically, the third normal map side hold information stored in the first area 143a of the third normal figure hold area 143 is shifted to the third normal figure execution area 143e, and then the second area 143b → the second. The third area reserved information is shifted so that 1 area 143a, 3rd area 143c → 2nd area 143b, and 4th area 143d → 3rd area 143c. When the third normal figure side hold information is shifted, the display content of the third normal figure hold display unit 137 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of the third normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

In the third normal map fluctuation start process, after the above shift process is executed, the third normal map side reserved information newly shifted to the third normal map execution area 143e is used as the lottery value for the third normal map open lottery process. To execute. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the 3rd public power opening in the 3rd public power opening lottery process is constant regardless of the gaming state, and specifically, the probability of winning the 3rd public power is 99/100. It will be an open win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the third public train opening may be higher or lower than this. Further, if the third normal drawing side hold information is acquired without executing the third normal power opening lottery process, the opening execution state of the third normal power device 123 may be surely generated.

In the third normal figure fluctuation start process, when the third normal electric open lottery process is executed, a process for specifying the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is executed. In the specific processing, a fixed display duration of 0.03 seconds is set to the third timer counter provided in the main RAM 74 regardless of the result of the third normal power opening lottery processing and the number of reserved information on the third normal drawing side. set. When the display continuation times are executed by the third normal figure display unit 133, the corresponding effects are not executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. After the first normal electric device 121 is in the open execution state, all of the second normal drawing side hold information acquired by the open execution state is digested, and the second normal drawing side hold information is triggered. All the open execution states of the second normal electric device 122 have been completed, and all of the third normal drawing side hold information acquired by the open execution state has been digested, and the third normal figure side hold information has been used as an opportunity. The jackpot state of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment corresponds to the period until all the open execution states of the third general electric device 123 are completed, and in the jackpot state, the effect corresponding to the jackpot state is displayed by the symbol display device 51. It is executed by the light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

In the third normal figure fluctuation start process, after executing the process for specifying the display continuation period, the change display of the pattern on the third normal figure display unit 133 is started. When the third normal figure display unit 133 causes the variable display of the pattern to be performed, the variable display table for the normal figure already described is referred to. After starting the variable display of the pattern on the third normal figure display unit 133, the value of the third normal figure normal electric counter is added by one. Since the value of the 3rd normal power counter is "0" when the 3rd normal power fluctuation start processing is executed, the value of the 3rd normal power counter becomes the 2nd normal power by adding 1. It becomes "1" corresponding to the processing during fluctuation (step S2311).

In the process during the change of the third normal figure in step S2311, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the continuous display rotation and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the third timer counter measuring the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is 0.01 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. If it is before the final display, the process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern in the third general drawing display unit 133 is executed. In addition, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the third normal figure display unit 133 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the third normal electric opening lottery process this time. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the 3rd normal drawing counter, the value of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the processing during the change of the 3rd normal figure to the processing during the determination of the 3rd normal figure (step S2312). Update to.

In the process of confirming the third normal figure in step S2312, it is determined whether or not the confirmed display period (specifically, 0.01 seconds) of the current display continuation times has elapsed. When the fixed display period has passed, it is determined whether or not the result of the third public power opening lottery process in this display continuation time is the third public power opening winning. If the third normal train is not won, the process of confirming the third normal train is terminated after the value of the third normal train counter is cleared to "0". When the third normal power opening is won, "3" is set as information on the number of times of opening and closing of the third normal power device 123 in the third normal power opening counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "10" is set in the third general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 as information on the maximum number of winnings to the third general electric device 123 in the open execution state this time. In addition, information corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the third timer counter as information on the open duration of the third general electric device 123. Further, by starting the output of the drive signal to the third general electric drive unit 123b, the third general electric device 123 is opened. After that, the third normal figure normal electric counter is added by 1. Since the value of the 3rd normal power counter is "2" when the 3rd normal power determination processing is executed, "3" corresponding to the 3rd normal power open processing (step S2313) after 1 addition. ".

In the process of opening the third normal power in step S2313, when a prize is generated in the third general power device 123, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the third general power winning counter of the main RAM 74. To do. Then, when the value of the third normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the third normal power release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the third timer counter is cleared to "0", and the third is further. By stopping the output of the drive signal to the 3 normal electric drive unit 123b, the 3rd general electric accessory 123a is closed and the value of the 3rd general electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third normal figure normal electric control process becomes the third normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2310). Further, even if the value of the third normal power winning counter is not "0", if the value of the third timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the third normal power drive unit 123b. By stopping the operation, the third utility object 123a is closed and the value of the third utility release counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the third normal electric opening counter is not "0", after setting the numerical information of the closing duration (specifically, 1 second) of the third general electric accessory 123a in the third timer counter. 3rd Fuzu The value of the Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third normal power control process becomes the third normal power closed process (step S2314). When the value of the third normal power release counter is "0", the value of the third normal power counter is cleared to "0" without setting the value in the third timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third normal figure normal electric control process becomes the third normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2310).

In the third normal power closing process in step S2314, the output of the drive signal to the third normal power drive unit 123b is started on condition that the value of the third timer counter is "0". 3 Set the numerical information of the opening duration (specifically, 3 seconds) when the utility accessory 123a is in the open state and the third utility accessory 123a is in the open state once in the third timer counter. .. Then, the value of the third normal figure normal electric counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third normal power control process becomes the third normal power open processing (step S2313).

As described above, when the third normal power control process is executed, the pattern is variablely displayed on the third normal power display unit 133 when a prize is generated in the second normal power device 122. .. Then, in the case where the third normal power opening is won in the third normal power opening lottery process, the third normal power device 123 is in the open execution state after the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 are completed. .. In the open execution state, the third general electric device 123 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the third general electric device 123 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated.

In the third normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121 or the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state, a positive determination is made in step S2304, and the fluctuation stop process is performed in step S2315. Execute. In the fluctuation stop processing, if the current display continuation time in the third normal figure display unit 133 is being executed, the display continuation time in the third normal figure display unit 133 is set to the display mode of the current display mode of the third normal figure display unit 133. The update of the third timer counter is temporarily stopped while being temporarily stopped in the state. Further, in the variable stop processing, "1" is set in the third stop flag provided in the main RAM 74.

In the third normal diagram normal electric control process, when a negative determination is made in step S2304 and "1" is set in the third stopped flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2305: YES), the third 3 Clear the stopped flag to "0" (step S2306). As a result, when the third normal figure display unit 133 is temporarily stopped in the middle of the display continuation times, the display continuation times are restarted and the update of the third timer counter is restarted.

As described above, in the third normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121 or the second normal power device 122 is in the open execution state, the display continuation times of the third normal power display unit 133 are temporarily stopped. Execute the process. As a result, when the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the display continuation times of the third general drawing display unit 133 from proceeding. Therefore, when the first general electric device 121 or the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the third general electric device 123 from being in the open execution state. Become.

<Fourth figure Fuden control process>
Next, the fourth normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the fourth normal drawing control process, the execution control of the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 and the execution control of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 are performed. FIG. 40 is a slow chart showing the fourth normal power control process.

First, the fourth normal figure general electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read (step S2401). In the 4th Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The fourth normal power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the fourth normal power control process on the main MPU 72.

No. 4 Fuden counter can take values of "0" to "3", and each value of "0" to "3" is the start address NA40 to NA43 of each process (step S2404 to step S2407). It corresponds to. Specifically, when the value of the 4th normal figure counter is "0", the 4th normal figure fluctuation start process (4th normal figure fluctuation start process) which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the 4th normal figure display unit 134 ( Step S2404) is the execution target, and when the value of the fourth normal figure counter is "1", the fourth normal figure change, which is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. When the intermediate process (step S2405) is the execution target and the value of the fourth normal figure counter is "2", the fourth process is for ending the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. When the process during confirmation of the normal figure (step S2406) is the execution target and the value of the fourth normal figure counter is "3", the fourth normal is a process for controlling the acceptance state of the special winning device 35. The process during power release (step S2407) is the execution target.

In the 4th Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the 4th Fuzu Fuden address table (step S2401), the start address corresponding to the information of the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is set to the 4th Fuzu Fuden address. It is acquired from the table (step S2402) and jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S2403). The processing contents of steps S2405 to S2407 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1407 to S1410 of the fourth general electric power control process (FIG. 27) in the fourth embodiment. Further, the processing content of the fourth normal figure fluctuation start processing in step S2404 is the fourth normal figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 28) in the fourth embodiment, except for the processing content of the specific processing of the fourth normal figure fluctuation period. It is the same as the processing content.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a specific process of the fourth normal figure fluctuation period.

First, it is determined whether or not one or more second normal drawing side reserved information is stored in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d of the second normal drawing holding area 142 (step S2501). If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S2501). Similar to the first embodiment, the first display duration is 0.45 seconds. In the situation where the first display continuation period is selected, as in the first embodiment, even if the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the special winning device 35 is basically not awarded.

On the other hand, when one or more of the second normal drawing side reserved information is stored and an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation times (step S2503). The duration of the third display is 1.5 seconds. In the situation where the third display continuation period is selected, it can be expected that one of the two game balls reaching the position where the special winning device 35 can be won will be won.

When any of the processes of step S2502 and step S2503 is executed, the information of the display duration selected in either step S2502 or step S2503 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2504).

With the above configuration, the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 in the situation where the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored. Winning to the special winning device 35 can occur frequently. As a result, in the jackpot state in which the second general electric device 122 and the third general electric device 123 are in the open execution state, not only the second general electric device 122 and the third general electric device 123 but also the special winning device 35 is awarded. It is possible to expect an increase in the number of game balls based on the above, and it is possible to increase the advantage of the jackpot state.

<Relationship between the display duration of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 and the acceptance state of the special winning device 35>
Next, the relationship between the display duration of the fourth general drawing display unit 134 and the acceptance state of the special winning device 35 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 42. FIG. 42 (a) shows a period in which the first general electric device 121 is in the open state, and FIG. 42 (b) shows a game ball detected by the first general electric device 121c of the first general electric device 121. 42 (c) shows the period during which the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132 are executed, and FIG. 42 (d) shows the hold storage of one or more second normal figure side hold information. 42 (e) shows the period during which the game ball is passing through the through winning unit 34, and FIG. 42 (f) shows the game ball at a position where the special winning device 35 can be won. 42 (g) shows the period during which the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are executed, and FIG. 42 (h) shows the special winning device 35 in the accepting state. Indicates the period of time.

As already explained, all the game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 and have not won any of the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123 will be awarded to the through winning section 34. .. Therefore, before the open execution state of the first general electric device 121 is started, as shown in FIG. 42 (e), a prize is generated in the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t1, the timing of t4, and the timing of t9. .. In these cases, as shown in FIG. 42 (g), in each period of the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the timing of t4 to the timing of t7, and the timing of t9 to the timing of t13, the fourth function according to the first display continuation period The display continuation times of the figure display unit 134 are performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (h) following the display continuation times, a special prize is won in each period of the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, and the timing of t13 to the timing of t14. The device 35 is in the acceptance execution state. In this case, the game ball that won the through winning section 34 at the timing of t1 is from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and the game ball that won the through winning section 34 at the timing of t4 is from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11. Over time, the game ball that won the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t9 will reach the position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 from the timing of t15 to the timing of t16, respectively. Since the special prize device 35 is not in the accepting state even during the period of, no prize is generated for the special prize device 35.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42A, the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state from the timing of t10 to the timing of t21. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42B, a prize is generated in the first general electric device 121 at each of the timing of t12, the timing of t17, and the timing of t18, and the second general drawing side holding information is acquired. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the display continuation times of the second general drawing display unit 132 from the timing of t12 to the timing of t19, triggered by the winning of the first general electric device 121 at the timing of t12. Is done. On the other hand, since the winning of the first general electric device 121 at the timing of t17 and the timing of t18 occurs in the situation where the display continuous times of the second general drawing display unit 132 are being performed, the second general drawing side holding information Will be stored on hold. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), at the timing of t17, one or more second normal drawing side hold information is held and stored.

As shown in FIG. 42 (e), a prize is generated in the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t20, which is a situation in which one or more of the second normal drawing side hold information is held and stored. Then, at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 42 (g), the display continuation times in the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 are started. Since one or more of the second normal drawing side hold information is held and stored, the display continuation time is the third display continuation period. Therefore, the display continuation time is performed from the timing of t20 to the timing of t22. Then, after the display continuation times are completed, the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state from the timing of t22 to the timing of t24 as shown in FIG. 42 (h). In this case, the position where the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 at the timing of t20 can win the special winning device 35 from the timing of t22 to the timing of t23 as shown in FIG. 42 (f). Exists in. Since this period corresponds to the period during which the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state, a prize will be generated for the special winning device 35.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to or in place of the effects described in the first embodiment.

In the jackpot state, not only the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 may be in the open execution state, but also the special winning device 35 may be in the acceptance execution state. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage in the jackpot state, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the jackpot state.

In the jackpot state, the first general electric device 121 is first in the open execution state, and the first general electric device 121 in the open execution state is awarded a prize to acquire the second general drawing side hold information. Then, the second electric power device 122 is in the open execution state. In this case, when the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are executed in the situation where the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored, the display continuation period of the display continuation times is the third display continuation period. Is set and the third display continuation period is set, so that the special winning device 35 is won a prize at a predetermined frequency. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of devices 35 and 122 can be won in the wake of winning the first general electric device 121, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the jackpot state. ..

Further, when the second normal drawing side holding information is acquired, the second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state without requiring the generation of further winning, whereas the special winning device 35 accepts it. In order to be in the execution state, it is necessary to win a prize in the through winning section 34 in a situation where the hold information on the second normal drawing side is held and stored, and further, in order to generate a prize in the special winning device 35. It is necessary for the game ball to reach a position where it is possible to enter the special winning device 35 after the third display continuation period is set in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134. As a result, even if it is possible to win a prize in each of the special prize device 35 and the second general electric device 122 by acquiring the second general drawing side hold information, the condition for generating the prize is the special prize device. It is possible to make the 35 and the second general electric device 122 different.

The through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided on the right side region PA3 on the downstream side of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123. As a result, the game balls that did not win the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 in the jackpot state can win the through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that are wasted in the jackpot state.

In the configuration in which the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored in the jackpot state, in the situation where the second normal figure side hold information is not held and stored, the first display is performed by the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134. By setting the duration, the special winning device 35 basically does not win a prize. As a result, it is possible to limit the situation in which the special winning device 35 is awarded at a predetermined frequency to the jackpot state.

If any of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 has occurred, the other state among them has occurred. Is not generated, but any one of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 has occurred. Even so, the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 may occur. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which prizes are generated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state based on the occurrence of a prize in the first general electric device 121, and the third general electric device 123 is based on the occurrence of a prize in the second general electric device 122. Is in the open execution state, any one of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 has occurred. In some cases other of them do not occur. As a result, the player can gradually aim for a prize in the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123. On the other hand, the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs regardless of the winning of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123. In this case, even if any one of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 has occurred. An open execution state of the special winning device 35 may occur. This creates a situation in which it is possible to simultaneously aim for a prize in any of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 and the special winning device 35. It becomes possible.

In a configuration in which the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 and the open execution state of any one of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 can occur in duplicate, the special winning device The 35 is provided at a position where a prize can be won when the game ball is flowing down so as to flow down toward the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123. As a result, it is possible to perform the firing operation aiming at both the winning of the special winning device 35 and the winning of any of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123. Will be.

If any of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 occurs, the other device among them The display continuation times in the corresponding normal map display units 131, 132, and 133 are prevented from progressing. As a result, any one of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 is performed only by adjusting the progress of the display continuation times. When is occurring, it is possible to prevent other states from occurring.

The states in which the display continuation times are not advanced as described above are the open execution state of the first general electric device 121, the open execution state of the second general electric device 122, and the open execution state of the third general electric device 123. Of these, the progress of the display continuation times is canceled after the state corresponding to the normal map display units 131, 132, 133 that is not the target of the stop is completed, and if the display continuation times are temporarily stopped in the middle, the display continuation is performed. The progress of the times is resumed. This makes it possible to prevent the display continuation times that have been stopped from progress from being invalidated.

<Another form of the tenth embodiment>
(1) Even if the 4th normal drawing side hold information is acquired, the special winning device 35 will not be in the acceptance execution state unless it is the acceptance winning result in the acceptance judgment process, but the 4th normal figure side hold information is The special winning device 35 may be configured to be in the acceptance execution state when it is acquired, and when the fourth general drawing side hold information is acquired, the special winning device 35 is accepted and executed with a probability of approximately 100%. It may be configured to be in a state.

(2) If the predetermined devices 121, 122, 123 that do not correspond to the normal map display units 131, 132, 133 are in the open execution state during the display continuation times in the normal map display units 131, 132, 133, the same. The configuration is such that the display continuation times during execution are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display continuation times of the display continuation times are continued for the period during which the predetermined devices 121, 122, 123 are in the open execution state. The period may be extended. In this case, during the period when the predetermined devices 121, 122, 123 are in the open execution state, the variable display of the pattern is continued on the normal map display units 131, 132, 133 corresponding to the display continuation times during execution. May be.

(3) The third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 in the situation where the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored. It is not limited, and even if the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 in the situation where the hold information on the third normal figure side is held and stored. Often, in a situation where either the second normal figure side hold information or the third normal figure side hold information is held and stored, the third display continuation period is set as the display continuation period in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134. The configuration may be selected, and in a situation where both the second normal figure side hold information and the third normal figure side hold information are held and stored, the display continuation period in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is the second. 3 The display duration may be selected.

(4) The display continuation time of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 is not temporarily stopped even if any of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and when any one of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the fourth general device is used. The display continuation times of the figure display unit 134 may be temporarily stopped, and when the event that triggered the temporary stop ends, the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 may be restarted.

(5) Limited to a configuration in which the third display continuation period is surely set when the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are started in the situation where the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored. It may be configured so that the third display continuation period can be easily set. Specifically, the display of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is continued regardless of whether the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored or the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored. Although the third display continuation period can be set in the times, the situation in which the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored is better than the situation in which the second normal figure side hold information is not held and stored. The third display continuation period may be easily set in the display continuation times of the display unit 134.

<11th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left side area PA2, a right side area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by the variable display unit 37 as in the first embodiment. The lower region PA4 is provided with a first through winning unit 160 in place of the first operating unit 32 in the first embodiment. In the first through winning unit 160, the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. In any case, it is provided at a position where a prize can be won. However, the variable display unit 37 is provided with an introduction port 37b that allows the game ball to flow into the stage 37a at the upper left portion of the variable display unit 37, and the game ball supplied to the stage 37a is the stage 37a. By sufficiently decelerating near the center in the lateral direction and flowing downward, it is easy for a ball to enter the first through winning portion 160. Therefore, when the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down toward the left region PA2 on the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper region PA1, the game is played toward the right region PA3. It is more likely that the ball will enter the first through winning unit 160 than when the firing operation is performed so that the ball flows down.

The first through winning portion 160 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole and is detected by the first through detection sensor 160a, the first through hole is detected by the main MPU 72. The occurrence of a prize in the through winning unit 160 is specified. Further, since the winning of the first through winning section 160 is only passed through the through hole in the vertical direction, the game ball winning the first through winning section 160 will continue to flow down the game area PA. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball that has entered the first through winning unit 160 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24. Further, when a prize is generated in the first through winning section 160, three game balls are paid out for each game ball, but the number of payouts is other than three. The game ball may not be paid out well. The left side region PA2 is not provided with a ball winning portion including the through winning portion 34 and the special winning device 35 in the first embodiment.

The right area PA3 is provided with a first general electric device 121, a second general electric device 122, a third general electric device 123, a fourth general electric device 161 and a second through winning portion 162. The first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, the third general electric device 123, the fourth general electric device 161 and the second through winning portion 162 are fired so as to flow down the left side region PA2. If there is, the prize cannot be won, and the prize can be won by performing the firing operation so as to flow down the right area PA3.

The first general electric device 121 is provided with a first general electric accessory 121a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the first general electric accessory 121a is closed, the game ball cannot win the first general electric device 121, and when the first general electric accessory 121a is in the open state, it is possible to win a prize in the first general electric device 121. Will be. The first universal power detection sensor 121c that detects the game ball that has won a prize in the first general electric drive unit 121b for opening and closing the first general electric accessory 121a and the first general electric device 121 are both the main control device 70 and electricity. Is connected. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the first general electric drive unit 121b, the first general electric accessory 121a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the first general electric accessory 121a is stopped. Returns to the closed state. Further, the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the first general electric device 121 based on the detection result of the first general electric detection sensor 121c. Further, when a prize is generated in the first electric device 121, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball, but the number of payouts is other than 15. May be good.

The second general electric device 122 is provided with a second general electric accessory 122a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the second general electric accessory 122a is closed, the game ball cannot win the second general electric device 122, and when the second general electric accessory 122a is opened, the second general electric device 122 can be won. Will be. The second general electric drive unit 122b for opening and closing the second general electric accessory 122a and the second general electric detection sensor 122c for detecting the winning game ball in the second general electric device 122 are both the main control device 70 and electricity. Is connected. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the second utility drive unit 122b, the second utility accessory 122a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the second utility accessory 122a is stopped. Returns to the closed state. Further, the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the second general electric device 122 based on the detection result of the second general electric detection sensor 122c. Further, when a prize is generated in the second general electric device 122, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball in the same manner as in the first general electric device 121. , The number of payouts may be other than 15.

The third general electric device 123 is provided with a third general electric accessory 123a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the third general electric accessory 123a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the third general electric device 123, and when the third general electric accessory 123a is in the open state, it is possible to win a prize in the third general electric device 123. Will be. The third universal power detection sensor 123c that detects the game ball that has won a prize in the third general electric drive unit 123b for opening and closing the third general electric accessory 123a and the third general electric device 123 are both the main control device 70 and electricity. Is connected. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the third utility drive unit 123b, the third utility accessory 123a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the third utility accessory 123a is stopped. Returns to the closed state. Further, the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the third general electric device 123 based on the detection result of the third general electric detection sensor 123c. In addition, when a prize is generated in the third general electric device 123, 15 game balls are entered for one game ball, as in the case of the first general electric device 121 and the second general electric device 122. Is executed, but the number of payouts may be other than 15.

The fourth utility device 161 is provided with a fourth utility accessory 161a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The game ball cannot win the 4th general electric device 161 in the closed state of the 4th general electric accessory 161a, and the 4th general electric device 161 can be won by opening the 4th general electric accessory 161a. Will be. The fourth universal power detection sensor 161c that detects the game ball that has won a prize in the fourth general electric drive unit 161b for opening and closing the fourth general electric accessory 161a and the fourth general electric device 161 are both the main control device 70 and electricity. Is connected. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the fourth utility drive unit 161b, the fourth utility accessory 161a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the fourth utility accessory 161a is stopped. Returns to the closed state. Further, the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the fourth normal electric device 161 based on the detection result of the fourth general electric detection sensor 161c. Further, when a prize is generated in the 4th general electric device 161, one game ball is entered in the same manner as in the 1st general electric device 121, the 2nd general electric device 122 and the 3rd general electric device 123. On the other hand, 15 game balls are paid out, but the number of payouts may be other than 15.

The second through winning portion 162 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball passes through the through hole and is detected by the second through detection sensor 162a, so that the second through MPU 72 is the second through hole. The occurrence of a prize in the through winning unit 162 is identified. Further, since the winning of the second through winning section 162 only passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, the game ball winning the second through winning section 162 continues to flow down the game area PA. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball that has entered the second through winning unit 162 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24. Further, when a prize is generated in the second through winning section 162, two game balls are paid out for each game ball, but the number of payouts is other than one. The game ball may not be paid out well.

The first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, the third general electric device 123, and the fourth general electric device 161 are arranged from the upstream side in the right area PA3 from the first general electric device 121 → the second general electric device 122 →. The third general electric device 123 → the fourth general electric device 161 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Further, the second through winning portion 162 is provided in the right side area PA3 on the left side of the area where the first general electric device 121 to the fourth general electric device 161 are provided and on the downstream side of the fourth general electric device 161. There is. On the upstream side of the second through winning section 162, a game ball that has flowed into the right region PA3 and has not won the first normal electric device 121 to the fourth general electric device 161 is the second through winning section 162. A right side guide area 163 for guiding to is formed. The method of forming the right guide region 163 is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the right guide region 163 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b. Due to the formation of the right side guide region 163, one of the two game balls that have flowed into the right side region PA3 and have not won a prize in the first general electric device 121 to the fourth general electric device 161. The probability of entering the second through winning section 162 is set so that the ball can be expected to enter the second through winning section 162.

Here, as described above, when one game ball wins in the second through winning section 162, two game balls are paid out. On the other hand, as described above, the second through of one of the two game balls that have flowed into the right side region PA3 and have not won the prizes in the first general electric device 121 to the fourth general electric device 161. The probability of entering the second through winning section 162 is set so that the winning section 162 can be expected to enter the ball. As a result, the player can aim to win the second through winning section 162 while not substantially increasing or decreasing the number of balls held.

In the area on the lower right side of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass, the first normal figure display unit 131, the second normal figure display unit 132, the third normal figure display unit 133, the fourth normal figure display unit 134, and the first normal The figure hold display unit 135, the second normal figure hold display unit 136, and the third normal figure hold display unit 137 are provided. Each of the first normal figure display units 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible for the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 51, but the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure It is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the display unit 134. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the patterns displayed on the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters Is displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable. Further, the display range of the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Further, the display range for both the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 and the first normal figure hold display unit 135 to the third normal figure hold display unit 137 is also the display range of the symbol display device 51. The area is narrower than the display surface. As a result, the player's attention to the symbol display device 51 is higher than that of the first normal figure display unit 131 to the fourth normal figure display unit 134 and the first normal figure hold display unit 135 to the third normal figure hold display unit 137. It becomes possible to increase.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the first through winning unit 160, the first general drawing display unit 131 performs the display continuation times including the variable display of the pattern. Further, the first normal figure holding display unit 135 is provided at a position adjacent to the first normal figure display unit 131. Up to four pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls that have won the first through winning section 160 are held as the holding information on the first normal drawing side, and the holding number is displayed by lighting the holding display section 135 of the first normal drawing. It has become so. As in the fourth embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the first normal drawing holding area 141 as an area for storing the first normal drawing side holding information.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the first general electric device 121 or the fourth general electric device 161, the second general drawing display unit 132 performs the display continuation times including the variation display of the pattern. Further, the second normal figure holding display unit 136 is provided at a position adjacent to the second normal figure display unit 132. Up to four pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls winning in the first normal electric device 121 or the fourth general electric device 161 are held as the second normal figure side hold information, and the second normal figure hold display unit 136 is lit. The number of pending items is displayed by. As in the fourth embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the second normal drawing holding area 142 as an area for storing the second normal drawing side holding information.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the second general electric device 122, the display continuous times including the variable display of the pattern are performed in the third general drawing display unit 133. Further, the third normal figure holding display unit 137 is provided at a position adjacent to the third normal figure display unit 133. Up to 4 pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls winning in the 2nd normal electric device 122 are held as the 3rd normal figure side hold information, and the hold number is displayed by lighting the 3rd normal figure hold display unit 137. It has become so. As in the fourth embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with a third normal drawing holding area 143 as an area for storing the third normal drawing side holding information.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the second through winning unit 162, the display continuation times including the variable display of the pattern are performed in the fourth normal drawing display unit 134. Here, the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is not provided with the normal figure hold display unit. That is, the fourth general drawing side hold information acquired when winning the second through winning section 162 is not stored on hold. As in the fourth embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with the fourth normal drawing execution area 144 as an area for storing the fourth normal drawing side holding information.

<1st Fuden control process>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the first normal figure normal electric control process for performing the execution control of the display continuous times in the first normal figure display unit 131 and the execution control of the open execution state of the first general electric device 121 will be described. FIG. 44 is a slow chart showing the first normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated in the first through winning unit 160 (step S2601: YES), the first normal drawing side hold stored in the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d of the first normal drawing holding area 141. On condition that the number of pieces of information is less than four, which is the upper limit (step S2602: NO), the storage process in the first general drawing reservation area 141 is executed (step S2603). In the storage process, the numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C11 is stored as the first general-purpose map side hold information, and the first general-purpose map side hold information in the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d of the first general figure hold area 141 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. When the first normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display contents of the first normal figure hold display unit 135 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the first normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S2601, an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, or the process of step S2603 is executed, the second general electric device 122, the third general electric device 123, or the fourth general electric device 161 Determines whether or not is in the open execution state (step S2604). If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the process of steps S2605 to S2615 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S2605 to S2615 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1105 to S1115 of the first general electric control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment. In this case, the probability of winning the first normal power opening in the first normal power opening lottery processing in the first normal figure fluctuation start processing (step S2611) is 1/100. Further, the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 and the symbol display device 51 selected in the first normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2611) is 1 second to 180 seconds. These configurations are the same as those in the fourth embodiment.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the process of step S2616 is executed. The processing content of step S2616 is the same as the processing content of step S1116 of the first normal power control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment.

By executing the first normal drawing control process as described above, the first normal drawing display unit 131 performs variable display of the pattern, triggered by the occurrence of a prize in the first through winning unit 160. At the same time, the symbol display device 51 performs variable display of the symbol. Then, when the first normal power opening is won in the first normal power opening lottery process, the first normal power device 121 is set after the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 and the symbol display device 51 are completed. It will be in the open execution state. In the open execution state, the first general electric device 121 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the first general electric device 121 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated. Further, when the game ball wins the first general electric device 121, the second general drawing side holding information is stored in the second general drawing holding area 142 up to a maximum of four pieces.

Further, in the 1st normal power control process, when the 2nd normal power device 122, the 3rd normal power device 123, or the 4th normal power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation time of the 1st normal power display unit 131 is performed. Executes the process for temporarily stopping. As a result, when the second general electric device 122, the third general electric device 123, or the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation times of the first general drawing display unit 131 are prevented from proceeding. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the second general electric device 122, the third general electric device 123, or the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state, the first general electric device 121 does not become the open execution state in duplicate. It becomes possible to do so.

<2nd Fuden control process>
Next, the second normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the second normal drawing control process, the execution control of the continuous display times in the second normal drawing display unit 132 and the execution control of the open execution state of the second normal drawing device 122 are performed. FIG. 45 is a slow chart showing the second normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated for the first general electric device 121 or the fourth general electric device 161 (step S2701: YES), it is stored in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d of the second general drawing holding area 142. On condition that the number of reserved information on the second normal figure side is less than four, which is the upper limit (step S2702: NO), the storage process in the second normal figure holding area 142 is executed (step S2703). In the storage process, the numerical information of the normal number counter C11 is stored as the second normal figure side hold information, and the second normal figure side hold information in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d of the second normal figure hold area 142 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. When the second normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display contents of the second normal figure hold display unit 136 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the second normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S2701, an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, or the process of step S2703 is executed, the first general electric device 121, the third general electric device 123, or the fourth general electric device 161 Determines whether or not is in the open execution state (step S2704). If a negative determination is made in step S2704, the process of steps S2705-step S2714 is executed. The processing content of these steps S2705-step S2714 is basically the same as the processing content of steps S1205-step S1214 of the second general-purpose electric control process (FIG. 25) in the fourth embodiment. However, the second normal power opening lottery process is not executed in the second normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2710), and after the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132 are completed, the second normal power is surely received. The device 122 is in the open execution state. Further, the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132 selected in the second normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2710) is fixed at 0.2 seconds.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, the process of step S2715 is executed. The processing content of step S2715 is the same as the processing content of step S1215 of the second normal power control process (FIG. 25) in the fourth embodiment.

As a result of the execution of the second normal power control process as described above, the second normal power display unit 132 takes the opportunity of winning a prize in the first normal power device 121 or the fourth normal power device 161. The variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, after the display continuation times in the second normal drawing display unit 132 are completed, the second normal electric device 122 is surely put into the open execution state. In the open execution state, the second general electric device 122 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the second electric device 122 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated. Further, when the game ball wins in the second normal electric device 122, the third normal figure side hold information is stored in the third normal figure hold area 143 up to four pieces.

Further, in the second normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121, the third normal power device 123, or the fourth normal power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation time of the second normal power display unit 132 is performed. Executes the process for temporarily stopping. As a result, when the first general electric device 121, the third general electric device 123, or the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation times of the second general drawing display unit 132 are prevented from proceeding. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the first general electric device 121, the third general electric device 123, or the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state, the second general electric device 122 does not become the open execution state in duplicate. It becomes possible to do so.

<Third general drawing control processing>
Next, the third normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the third normal drawing control process, the execution control of the continuous display times in the third normal drawing display unit 133 and the execution control of the open execution state of the third normal drawing device 123 are performed. FIG. 46 is a slow chart showing the third normal power control process.

When a prize has been generated in the second general electric device 122 (step S2801: YES), the third general drawing side hold stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third general drawing holding area 143. On condition that the number of pieces of information is less than four, which is the upper limit (step S2802: NO), the storage process in the third normal figure holding area 143 is executed (step S2803). In the storage process, the numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C11 is stored as the third normal figure side hold information, and the third normal figure side hold information in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third normal figure hold area 143 is stored. Store in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that are not. When the third normal figure side hold information is acquired, the display content of the third normal figure hold display unit 137 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the third normal figure side hold information this time. Set the data to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S2801, an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, or the process of step S2803 is executed, the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, or the fourth general electric device 161 Determines whether or not is in the open execution state (step S2804). If a negative determination is made in step S2804, the processes of steps S2805 to S2814 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S2805 to S2814 are basically the same as the processing contents of steps S2305 to S2314 of the third general electric power control process (FIG. 39) in the tenth embodiment. However, in the third normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2810), the third normal figure opening lottery process is not executed, and after the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 are completed, the third normal electric is surely made. The device 123 is in the open execution state.

Further, the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 selected in the third normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2810) is fixed at 0.03 seconds. As described above, the display continuation period of the display continuation times on the second general diagram display unit 132 is fixed at 0.2 seconds, and when the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the second is The progress of the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 132 is temporarily stopped, and when the open execution state ends, the progress of the display continuation times is restarted. In the configuration, the display continuation period of the third ordinary figure display unit 133 is the period obtained by multiplying the display continuation period by "4" which is a value corresponding to the upper limit number of reserved storage of the third ordinary figure side reserved information. By setting the period to be shorter than the display continuation period of the normal figure display unit 132, all of the third normal figure side hold information acquired in the one open execution state of the second normal electric device 122. It is possible to prevent the new open execution state of the second general electric device 122 from being started before the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 corresponding to the above is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the process of step S2815 is executed. The processing content of step S2815 is the same as the processing content of step S2315 of the third normal power control process (FIG. 39) in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, when the third normal power control process is executed, the pattern is variablely displayed on the third normal power display unit 133 when a prize is generated in the second normal power device 122. .. Then, after the display continuation times in the third normal drawing display unit 133 are completed, the third normal electric device 123 is surely put into the open execution state. In the open execution state, the third general electric device 123 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the third general electric device 123 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated.

Further, in the third normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121, the second normal power device 122, or the fourth normal power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation times of the third normal power display unit 133 Executes the process for temporarily stopping. As a result, when the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, or the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation times of the third general drawing display unit 133 are prevented from proceeding. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, or the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state, the third general electric device 123 does not become the open execution state in duplicate. It becomes possible to do so.

<Fourth figure Fuden control process>
Next, the fourth normal power control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the fourth normal drawing control process, the execution control of the display continuation times in the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 and the execution control of the open execution state of the fourth normal drawing device 161 are performed. FIG. 47 is a slow chart showing the fourth normal power control process.

First, it is determined whether or not the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state (step S2901). If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the processes of steps S2902 and S2903 are executed. These processes will be described later. After that, the fourth normal figure general electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read (step S2904). In the 4th Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The fourth normal power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the fourth normal power control process on the main MPU 72.

The fourth normal figure normal electric counter can take the value of "0" to "4", and each value of "0" to "4" is the start address NA40 to NA44 of each process (step S2907 to step S2911). It corresponds to. Specifically, when the value of the 4th normal figure counter is "0", the 4th normal figure fluctuation start process (4th normal figure fluctuation start process) which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the 4th normal figure display unit 134 ( Step S2907) is the execution target, and when the value of the fourth normal-figure counter is "1", the fourth normal-figure variation, which is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the fourth normal-figure display unit 134. When the middle process (step S2908) is the execution target and the value of the fourth normal figure counter is "2", the fourth process is for ending the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. The process during determination of the normal figure (step S2909) is the execution target, and when the value of the fourth normal power counter is "3", it is a process for controlling the open state of the fourth normal power device 161. 4 The process during opening of the normal power (step S2910) is the execution target, and when the value of the 4th normal power counter is "4", it is a process for returning the 4th normal power device 161 to the open state again. The fourth normal electric closed processing (step S2911) is the execution target.

In the 4th Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the 4th Fuzu Fuden address table (step S2904), the start address corresponding to the information of the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is set to the 4th Fuzu Fuden address. It is acquired from the table (step S2905) and jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S2906). Hereinafter, each process of steps S2907 to S2911 will be described individually.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the fourth normal diagram variation start process of step S2907. When a prize has been generated in the second through winning unit 162 (step S3001: YES), the opening determination process is executed (step S3002). In the open determination process, the numerical information of the current normal electric random number counter C11 is stored in the execution area 144 for the 4th normal drawing as the holding information on the 4th normal drawing side. Then, the openness determination table is read from the main ROM 73, and the read openness determination table is collated with the fourth ordinary figure side hold information stored in the fourth ordinary figure execution area 144. In this case, the probability of being determined as the open winning result in the open determination process is determined by the first open lottery process in the first normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2611) of the first normal figure normal electric control process (FIG. 44). It is 1/100, which is the same as the probability of winning the first public train.

When the result of the open determination process is the open winning result (step S3003: YES), the stop result setting process for the open winning result is executed (step S3004). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the open winning result to be finally stopped and displayed in the current display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. .. It should be noted that one type of stop mode may be set for the open winning result, or a plurality of types of stop modes for the open winning result may be set.

When the result of the open determination process is not the open winning result (step S3003: NO), the stop result setting process for the off result is executed (step S3005). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the disengagement result to be finally stopped and displayed on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 at the current display continuation time is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the open winning result.

After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the specification process of the fourth normal figure fluctuation period is executed (step S3006). After that, the variable display of the pattern on the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 is started (step S3007). When the fourth normal figure display unit 134 causes the variable display of the pattern to be performed, the variable display table for the normal figure already described is referred to.

After that, the value of the 4th normal power counter is added by 1 (step S3008). Since the value of the 4th normal power counter is "0" when the 4th normal power fluctuation start processing is executed, the value of the 4th normal power counter becomes the 4th normal power by adding 1. It becomes "1" corresponding to the processing during fluctuation (step S2908).

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the fourth normal figure fluctuation period in step S3006.

In the specific process, when the result of the open determination process in the current display continuation time is not the open winning result (step S3101: NO), the display continuation period of the current display continuation time in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is a long period of time. Is selected (step S3102). It is set to a fixed 600 seconds for a long period of time. This period is longer than the longest display continuation period that can be selected in the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131. In the case where the result is not the open winning result, the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is set to 600 seconds for a long period of time, so that the first normal electric device 121 and the second normal are set. When the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right region PA3 in a situation other than the jackpot state in which either the electric device 122 or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the fourth It is possible to reduce the digestion efficiency of the continuous display times on the normal map display unit 134, and in this situation, the player is informed that the game ball should be launched so as to flow down the left side area PA2 instead of the right side area PA3. It becomes possible to recognize.

On the other hand, when the result of the open determination process in the current display continuation time is the open winning result (step S3101: YES), a short period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation time in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. (Step S3103). The short period is set to a fixed 0.1 second.

As described above, when the 4th general electric device 161 is in the open execution state and a prize is generated for the 4th general electric device 161, the second normal is the same as when the 1st general electric device 121 is awarded. The drawing side hold information is held and stored. When the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored, the display continuation times of the second normal figure display unit 132 are executed, and when the display continuation times of the second normal figure display unit 132 are executed. The second general electric device 122 is in the open execution state, and the third general electric device 123 is held and stored based on the winning of the second general electric device 122, so that the third general electric device 123 is surely opened thereafter. It will be in the execution state. In other words, basically, the 1st Fuden opening lottery process is triggered by the 1st Fuzu side hold information acquired based on the winning of the 1st through winning section 160, and the 1st Fuden opening is won. 2 The general electric device 122 and the third general electric device 123 shift to the jackpot state in which the open execution state is established, but the fourth general electric device 161 becomes the open execution state in the middle of the jackpot state and the fourth general electric device By holding and storing the second general drawing side hold information based on the winning of 161, the number of times that the second general electric device 122 and the third general electric device 123 are in the open execution state in the jackpot state is increased. It becomes. In this configuration, the display continuation period of the display continuation times on the second normal figure display unit 132 is fixed at 0.2 seconds, and the display continuation period of the display continuation times on the third normal figure display unit 133 is 0.03 seconds. It is fixed to. In this case, the display continuation period of the fourth ordinary figure display unit 134 selected when the open winning result is obtained is set to a period shorter than the display continuation period of the second ordinary figure display unit 132. Even if the display continuation times of the 4th normal figure display unit 134 corresponding to the open winning result are executed at any timing of the jackpot state, a prize is generated in the 4th normal electric device 161 and the 2nd normal figure side is held. It is possible to generate a situation in which information is newly acquired at a timing close to a situation in which the second general electric device 122 or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state. Further, since the display continuation period of the fourth ordinary figure display unit 134 selected when the open winning result is obtained is set to a period longer than the display continuation period of the third ordinary figure display unit 133, the fourth It is possible to guarantee the period during which the display continuation times are executed in the normal map display unit 134 to some extent.

After selecting the short period, the short period selection command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3104). The short-term selection command is a command for causing the sound-light side MPU 92 to recognize that the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state. When the sound light side MPU 92 receives the short-term selection command in the jackpot state in which the second general electric device 122 or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state. So that the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 perform an effect of making the player aware that the fourth general electric device 161 should win the game ball. To do.

The sound / light side MPU 92 is a command transmitted by the main MPU 72 when the second normal drawing side hold information is acquired and a command transmitted by the main MPU 72 when the third normal drawing side hold information is acquired. Based on this, the number of the 2nd normal drawing side reserved information and the number of the 3rd normal drawing side reserved information are grasped, and the player recognizes the number of the 2nd normal drawing side reserved information and the number of the 3rd normal drawing side reserved information. The effect to be made possible may be configured to be executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. In this case, in the jackpot state, the 4th normal electric device 161 is in the open execution state, and when the 2nd normal drawing side hold information is acquired based on the winning of the 4th general electric device 161, the corresponding effect is displayed. By being executed by the display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64, the number of times that the second general electric device 122 and the third general electric device 123 are in the open execution state in the current jackpot state has increased. The player can clearly recognize it. Further, the sound / light side MPU 92 is that the display continuation time is executed and the display continuation time is executed based on the command transmitted by the main MPU 72 when the display continuation time is executed in the fourth normal figure display unit 134. The effect corresponding to the result of the open determination process may be executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the fourth general electric device 161 is in the open execution state in the jackpot state.

When any of the processes of step S3102 and step S3104 is executed, the information of the display duration selected in any of step S3102 and step S3104 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3105).

In the process of changing the fourth normal figure in step S2908, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the continuous display rotation and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the fourth timer counter measuring the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is 0.05 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. Before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is executed. Further, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the opening determination process this time. After that, by adding 1 to the value of the 4th normal drawing counter, the value of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the 4th normal figure changing process to the 4th normal figure finalizing process (step S2909). Update to.

In the process of confirming the fourth normal figure in step S2909, it is determined whether or not the confirmed display period (specifically, 0.05 seconds) of the current display continuation times has elapsed. When the fixed display period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the result of the open determination process in the current display continuation time is the open winning result. If it is not the open winning result, after clearing the value of the 4th normal drawing counter to "0", the processing during the determination of the 4th normal figure is terminated. When the result is an open winning result, "3" is set as information on the number of times of opening / closing of the 4th ordinary electric device 161 in the 4th ordinary electric opening counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, "10" is set as information on the upper limit of the number of winnings to the 4th ordinary electric device 161 in the current open execution state in the 4th ordinary electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 74. Further, the information corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the 4th timer counter as the information of the open continuation period of the 4th electric power device 161. Further, by starting the output of the drive signal to the fourth normal electric drive unit 161b, the fourth general electric device 161 is opened. After that, the 4th Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1. Since the value of the 4th normal power counter is "2" when the 4th normal power determination processing is executed, "3" corresponding to the 4th normal power open processing (step S2910) after 1 addition. ".

In the process of opening the 4th normal power in step S2910, when a prize is generated in the 4th normal power device 161, the value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the 4th normal power winning counter of the main RAM 74. To do. Then, when the value of the 4th normal power winning counter is "0", the value of the 4th normal power release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the 4th timer counter is cleared to "0", and the fourth By stopping the output of the drive signal to the 4th normal electric drive unit 161b, the 4th normal electric accessory 161a is closed and the value of the 4th normal electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth normal figure normal electric control process becomes the fourth normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2907). Further, even if the value of the 4th normal power winning counter is not "0", if the value of the 4th timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the 4th normal power driving unit 161b. By stopping the operation, the fourth utility accessory 161a is closed and the value of the fourth utility release counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the 4th utility opening counter is not "0", after setting the numerical information of the closing duration (specifically, 1 second) of the 4th utility accessory 161a in the 4th timer counter. The value of the 4th ordinary power counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth normal power control process becomes the fourth normal power closed process (step S2911). When the value of the 4th normal power release counter is "0", the value of the 4th normal power counter is cleared to "0" without setting the value in the 4th timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth normal figure normal electric control process becomes the fourth normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2907).

In the process during closing of the 4th normal power in step S2911, the output of the drive signal to the 4th normal power drive unit 161b is started on condition that the value of the 4th timer counter is "0". 4 Set the numerical information of the opening duration (specifically, 3 seconds) when the universal accessory 161a is opened and the fourth utility accessory 161a is opened once in the fourth timer counter. .. Then, the value of the 4th normal drawing counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth normal power control process becomes the fourth normal power open processing (step S2910).

As described above, when the 4th normal drawing control process is executed, the 4th normal drawing display unit 134 performs variable display of the pattern, triggered by the occurrence of a prize in the 2nd through winning unit 162. .. Then, when the open winning result is obtained in the open determination process, the fourth normal electric device 161 is put into the open execution state after the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are completed. In the open execution state, the fourth general electric device 161 performs the open state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration of 1 second in between. If the number of winning game balls to the 4th electric device 161 is 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, before the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, this open execution state is terminated.

In the fourth normal electric control process, when the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, a positive determination is made in step S2901 to take a step. The adjustment process is executed in S2912. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the adjustment process.

In the adjustment process, if the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are the display continuation times (step S3201: YES), and if the display continuation times this time do not correspond to the open winning result (step S3202: NO), the fluctuation ends. The process is executed (step S3203). In the variable end processing, if the display mode of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is a stop result corresponding to the deviation result, the state is maintained, and if the display mode is not the stop result corresponding to the deviation result, the stop result corresponding to the deviation result is maintained. And. Further, in the fluctuation end processing, the fourth timer counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the current display continuation time on the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is terminated in the middle with the stop result corresponding to the off result being displayed. The stop result corresponding to the disengagement result corresponds to the information of the stop mode of the pattern for the disengagement result read into the main RAM 74 in step S3005 of the fourth normal figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 48). After that, the value of the 4th normal drawing counter is cleared to "0" (step S3204). As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth normal figure normal electric control process becomes the fourth normal figure fluctuation start process (step S2907).

When the display continuation time this time corresponds to the open winning result (step S3202: YES), the fluctuation stop processing is executed (step S3205). In the fluctuation stop processing, the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are temporarily stopped in the state of the current display mode of the fourth normal figure display unit 134, and the update of the fourth timer counter is temporarily stopped. Further, in the variable stop processing, "1" is set in the fourth stop flag provided in the main RAM 74.

In the fourth normal diagram normal electric control process, when a negative determination is made in step S2901 and "1" is set in the fourth stopped flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2902: YES), the first 4 The stopped flag is cleared to “0” (step S2903). As a result, when the fourth normal figure display unit 134 is temporarily stopped in the middle of the display continuation times, the display continuation times are restarted and the update of the fourth timer counter is restarted.

As described above, in the 4th normal electric control process, when the 1st general electric device 121, the 2nd general electric device 122 or the 3rd general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the 4th normal figure does not correspond to the open winning result. If the display continuation time of the display unit 134 is used, the display continuation time is terminated halfway. As a result, the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 corresponding to the disengagement result in order to suppress the firing operation of the game ball so as to flow down the right region PA3 in a situation other than the jackpot state. In the jackpot state, the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, or the third general electric device 123 is set to the open execution state, and the result of the deviation is dealt with. 4 It is possible to end the display continuation times of the normal figure display unit 134 in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 corresponding to the off result in the jackpot state from continuing meaninglessly, and as a result, the fourth normal electric device 161 in the jackpot state. Can be increased in the possibility of being in the open execution state.

On the other hand, in the fourth normal power control process, when the first normal power device 121, the second normal power device 122, or the third normal power device 123 is in the open execution state, the fourth normal power display corresponding to the open winning result is displayed. A process for temporarily stopping the display continuation times of the unit 134 is executed. As a result, when the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display unit 134 corresponding to the open winning result Can be prevented from progressing. Therefore, the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state while preventing the right of the fourth general electric device 161 to be in the open execution state to be invalidated. In this case, it is possible to prevent the fourth power supply device 161 from being in the open execution state by overlapping with it.

<State of jackpot state>
Next, the state of the jackpot state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 51 (a) shows the period during which the display continuation times on the first general diagram display unit 131 are executed, and FIG. 51 (b) shows the period during which the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state. FIG. 51 (c) shows the timing at which the second normal figure side hold information is acquired, and FIG. 51 (d) shows the period during which the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132 are executed. e) shows the period during which the second normal electric device 122 is in the open execution state, FIG. 51 (f) shows the timing when the third normal drawing side hold information is acquired, and FIG. 51 (g) shows the third. FIG. 51 (h) shows the period during which the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 133 are executed, FIG. 51 (h) shows the period during which the third normal electric device 123 is in the open execution state, and FIG. 51 (i) shows the fourth. FIG. 51 (j) shows the period during which the display continuation times in the normal figure display unit 134 are executed, and FIG. 51 (j) shows the period during which the fourth normal electric device 161 is in the open execution state.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the display continuation times in the first normal drawing display unit 131 are performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. Since this display continuation time corresponds to the first normal power opening winning, after the display continuous time is completed, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the first power supply device 121 extends from the timing of t2 to the timing of t7. Is in the open execution state. When the first general electric device 121 is in the open execution state, the player changes the launch operation in which the game ball flows down in the left area PA2 to the launch operation in which the game ball flows down in the right area PA3. To do. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the first general electric device 121. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the second normal drawing side hold information is acquired and held and stored at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6 in the middle of the open execution state. Will be done. Since the display continuation times in the second normal figure display unit 132 are not started in the open execution state of the first normal electric device 121, the second normal figure display unit is stored even if the second normal figure side hold information is held and stored. The display continuation times in 132 are not started.

After that, when the open execution state of the first general electric device 121 ends at the timing of t7, the display continuation times in the second general drawing display unit 132 are started at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 51 (d). , The display continuation time is executed until the timing of t9. At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the display continuation times on the first normal drawing display unit 131 are also started. Further, in this situation, since the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3, a prize is generated in the second through winning unit 162, and as shown in FIG. 51 (i), at the timing of t8. The display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are started. The display continuation times are not the result of opening winning in the opening judgment process.

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the display continuation times in the second general drawing display unit 132 are completed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the second general electric device 122 is opened. It becomes a state. In this case, the display continuation times in the fourth general drawing display unit 134, which does not correspond to the open winning result, ends in the middle at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 51 (i). Further, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the display continuation times in the first normal drawing display unit 131 are temporarily stopped.

The open execution state of the second general electric device 122 started at the timing of t9 is executed until the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 51 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the hold information on the third normal drawing side is acquired at each of the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13 in the middle of the open execution state, and the hold storage is stored. Will be done. In addition, since the display continuation times in the third normal figure display unit 133 are not started in the open execution state of the second normal power device 122, even if the hold information on the third normal figure side is reserved and stored, the third normal figure display unit The display continuation times in 133 are not started.

After that, when the open execution state of the second normal electric device 122 ends at the timing of t14, the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 are restarted at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 51 (a). , As shown in FIG. 51 (d), the display continuation times in the second ordinary figure display unit 132 are started, and as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the display continuation times in the third ordinary figure display unit 133 are started. Then, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the display continuation times in the third general drawing display unit 133 are completed first, so that the third general electric device 123 is shown in FIG. 51 (h). It will be in the open execution state. In this case, at the timing of t15, the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and the second normal figure display unit is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 51 (d). The display continuation times in 132 are temporarily stopped.

The open execution state of the third general electric device 123 started at the timing of t15 ends at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 51 (h). As a result, at the timing of t16, the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 are restarted as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and the display in the second normal figure display unit 132 is restarted as shown in FIG. 51 (d). The continuous times are restarted, and as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the continuous display times on the third normal drawing display unit 133 are started. Then, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the display continuation times in the third general drawing display unit 133 are completed first, so that the third general electric device 123 is shown in FIG. 51 (h). It will be in the open execution state. In this case, at the timing of t17, the display continuation times in the first normal figure display unit 131 are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and the second normal figure display unit is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 51 (d). The display continuation times in 132 are temporarily stopped.

After that, by repeating the above operation, the jackpot state progresses and the number of reserved information on the second normal drawing side becomes 0, and then the timing of t18 to the timing of t19 is shown in FIG. 51 (g). As shown, the display continuation times in the third ordinary figure display unit 133 are started, and the display continuation times in the fourth ordinary figure display unit 134 are started as shown in FIG. 51 (i). It should be noted that the display continuation times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134 correspond to the open winning result. Then, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the display continuation times in the third normal drawing display unit 133 are completed, and at the timing of t19, the third normal electric power is displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (h). The device 123 is in the open execution state. In this case, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 51 (i), the display continuation times in the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 corresponding to the open winning result are temporarily stopped.

After that, the open execution state of the third general electric device 123 ends at the timing of t20. As a result, at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 51 (i), the display continuation times in the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 corresponding to the open winning result are restarted. Then, when the display continuation times in the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 are completed at the timing of t21, as shown in FIG. 51 (j), the fourth normal electric device 161 extends from the timing of t21 to the timing of t26. It will be in the open execution state. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the second normal drawing side hold information is acquired and held and stored at each of the timing of t22, the timing of t23, the timing of t24, and the timing of t25, which are in the middle of the open execution state. Will be done. As a result, the opportunity for the second general electric device 122 to be in the open execution state is given again.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the open execution state of any of the first normal electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123 is started in the middle of the display continuous times in the fourth normal figure display unit 134, the display continuous times are subsequently the fourth normal. If it corresponds to the fact that the open execution state of the electric device 161 does not occur, the display continuation time is terminated as it is. As a result, the display continuation times of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134, which does not lead to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general power device 161, is the opening execution of any one of the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123. It is possible to terminate the process when a state occurs, and while giving priority to the generation of the open execution state of any of the first normal power device 121 to the third normal power device 123, the display continuous times of the fourth normal power display unit 134 are digested. It is possible to increase efficiency. On the other hand, when the display continuation time corresponds to the subsequent occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general electric device 161, the generation timing of the open execution state of the fourth general electric device 161 is delayed. As a result, while giving priority to the occurrence of the open execution state of any of the first general electric devices 121 to the third general electric device 123, the benefit of the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general electric device 161 is not lost. It becomes possible to do so.

In the middle of the continuous display rotation of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 corresponding to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general electric device 161, any of the open execution states of the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123 is changed. When it is started, the progress of the display continuation times is stopped, and then the progress of the display continuation times is restarted when the open execution state of the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123 is completed. It is a composition. As a result, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effect only by temporarily stopping and canceling the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134.

Even if a prize is generated in the second through winning unit 162 in a situation where the display continuation times of the fourth ordinary drawing display unit 134 cannot be started, the holding information on the fourth ordinary drawing side is not acquired. That is, the fourth normal drawing side hold information is not stored on hold. As a result, in a situation where the display continuation times of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 are not executed, any of the first normal electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123 is opened, and the second through winning is further won. Even if a prize is awarded to the section 162, it is not necessary to acquire the 4th ordinary drawing side holding information in response to the occurrence of the winning, and it is necessary to perform a process such as deleting the 4th ordinary drawing side reserved information once acquired. Does not occur.

The display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 corresponding to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general electric device 161 does not correspond to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general electric device 161. It is shorter than the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the figure display unit 134. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period required from the start of the continuous display rotation of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 to the start of the open execution state of the fourth normal electric device 161. In this case, the display continuation times of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134, which does not correspond to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general electric device 161, is the opening execution of any of the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123. Terminated when a condition occurs. As a result, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the continuous display times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134.

The second through winning section 162 and the fourth general electric device 161 are provided in the right area PA3 together with the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123, but the second through is provided even if it is not in the jackpot state. It is possible to win a prize in the winning section 162, and when a winning in the second through winning section 162 occurs, an open execution state of the fourth electric power device 161 may occur. On the other hand, the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth general drawing display unit 134, which does not correspond to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general electric device 161 is set long. As a result, it is possible to reduce the game efficiency when aiming to win the second through winning unit 162 in a state other than the jackpot state. In this case, the display continuation times of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134, which does not correspond to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general electric device 161, is the opening execution of any of the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123. Terminated when a condition occurs. As a result, in the jackpot state, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the continuous display of the fourth normal figure display unit 134.

When the 1st Fuden opening lottery process executed based on the winning of the 1st thru winning section 160 wins the 1st Fuden opening, the 1st Fuden device 121 is in the open execution state and the 1st Fuden is opened. While the second general drawing side hold information that triggers the occurrence of the open execution state of the second general electric device 122 is acquired based on the winning of the device 121, it is executed based on the winning of the second through winning section 162. By winning the 4th Fuden opening lottery in the 4th Fuden opening lottery process, the 4th Fuden device 161 is in the open execution state, and based on the winning of the 4th Fuden device 161, the 2nd Fuden device is held Information is acquired. As a result, the player expects that the fourth electric power device 161 is in the open execution state.

<Another form of the eleventh embodiment>
(1) When the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right side region PA3 in a situation where the jackpot is not in a state, the corresponding notification may be performed. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second through winning unit 162 in the jackpot state, at least one of the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 is used to determine the right side region. A notification is made so that the player can recognize that the firing of the game ball toward the PA3 is stopped. As a result, it is possible to discourage the player from aiming for the game ball to enter the second through winning unit 162 in the game state which is not the jackpot state.

(2) The display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 corresponding to the opening execution state of the fourth normal electric device 161 is determined according to the number of reserved information on the second normal figure side. It may be configured to be. Specifically, as the number of reserved information on the second normal drawing side is smaller, a shorter display continuation period may be selected as the display continuation period. More specifically, as the configuration, the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 corresponding to the open execution state of the fourth normal drawing device 161 in the situation where the number of holding information on the second normal drawing side is four. In the situation where the period required to digest the four second normal drawing side reserved information is selected as the display continuous period of the display continuous times of, and the number of the second normal drawing side reserved information is three. As the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 corresponding to the fourth normal electric device 161 being in the open execution state, it is necessary to digest the three second normal figure side reserved information. In a situation where the period is selected and the number of reserved information on the 2nd normal drawing side is 2, the display continuation time of the 4th normal drawing display unit 134 corresponding to the opening execution state of the 4th normal drawing device 161. As the display continuation period of, the period required to digest the two 2nd ordinary drawing side reserved information is selected, and in the situation where the number of the 2nd ordinary drawing side reserved information is 1 is selected, the 4th ordinary electric power is displayed. As the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 corresponding to the device 161 being in the open execution state, a period required to digest one second normal figure side hold information is selected. To do so. As a result, in a situation where the number of reserved information on the second normal drawing side acquired by winning the first general electric device 121 is reduced, the open execution state of the fourth general electric device 161 is started and the second It is possible to newly acquire the holding information on the normal drawing side, and it is possible to increase the number of holding information on the second normal drawing side that is digested in one big hit state.

Further, the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 corresponding to the opening execution state of the fourth normal electric device 161 is performed with reference to the number of reserved information on the second normal figure side. Instead, the configuration may be performed by referring to the number of reserved information on the second normal drawing side and the number of reserved information on the third normal drawing side. In this case, not only the shorter display duration is selected as the number of held information on the second normal drawing side is smaller, but also the third normal is compared with the case where the number of held information on the second normal drawing side is the same. By configuring the display duration to be selected as the number of reserved information on the drawing side decreases, the number of reserved information on the 2nd and 3rd drawing side that is digested in one jackpot state. Can be increased.

(3) The display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display unit 134 corresponding to the opening execution state of the fourth general electric device 161 is not fixed but is set to multiple types, and the display continuation of the setting target The period may be determined by lottery. As a result, it is possible to diversify the period required from the start of the continuous display rotation of the fourth normal drawing display unit 134 to the opening execution state of the fourth normal power device 161.

(4) Although the configuration is such that the holding information on the 4th normal drawing side is not stored on hold, the holding information on the 4th normal drawing side may be held and stored. In this case, when any of the 1st normal electric device 121 to the 3rd general electric device 123 is in the open execution state and the 4th normal drawing side holding information is exhausted, the 4th normal drawing side holding information is reached. Is invalidated when does not correspond to the open execution state of the 4th general electric device 161, and when the hold information on the 4th normal drawing side corresponds to the open execution state of the 4th general electric device 161 The configuration may be such that the setting as the start target of the display continuation times of the fourth general drawing display unit 134 is waited until the open execution state of the first general electric device 121 to the third general electric device 123 is completed. As a result, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the reserved information on the 4th normal drawing side while not losing the benefit of the 4th normal electric device 161 being in the open execution state.

(5) In the right side region PA3, the fourth general electric device 161 is provided on the downstream side of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123. The configuration is not limited, and the fourth general electric device 161 may be provided on the upstream side of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 in the right side region PA3. Good. As a result, it becomes possible to easily generate a prize in the fourth electric power device 161.

(6) The predetermined devices 121, 122, 123, 161 that do not correspond to the normal map display units 131, 132, 133, 134 are in the open execution state during the display continuation times in the normal map display units 131, 132, 133, 134. In the case of, the display continuation times during the execution are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the predetermined devices 121, 122, 123, 161 are in the open execution state. The display continuation period of the display continuation times may be extended by the amount. In this case, during the period when the predetermined devices 121, 122, 123, 124 are in the open execution state, the pattern variation display is displayed on the general map display units 131, 132, 133, 134 corresponding to the display continuation times during execution. It may be a continuous configuration.

(7) One of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state while the display continuous times of the fourth normal figure display unit 134 are being executed. In that case, if the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth power supply device 161, the display continuation time is terminated and invalidated, and the display continuation time is the fourth power supply device. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of the open execution state of 161, the display continuation time may be temporarily stopped and then restarted.

(8) One of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state while the display continuation times of the fourth general drawing display unit 134 are being executed. In that case, if the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the 4th power supply device 161, the display continuation time is shortened, and the display continuation time is the opening execution of the 4th power supply device 161. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of the state, the display continuation times may be terminated and invalidated.

(9) One of the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, and the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state while the display continuation times of the fourth general drawing display unit 134 are being executed. In that case, if the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the 4th power supply device 161, the display continuation time is extended, and the display continuation time is the opening execution of the 4th power supply device 161. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of the state, the display continuation time may be shortened.

<12th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left side area PA2, a right side area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by the variable display unit 37 as in the first embodiment. The lower region PA4 is provided with a predetermined through winning unit 171 in place of the first operating unit 32 in the first embodiment. In the predetermined through winning unit 171, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 and when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. In any case, it is provided at a position where a prize can be won. However, the variable display unit 37 is provided with an introduction port 37b that allows the game ball to flow into the stage 37a at the upper left portion of the variable display unit 37, and the game ball supplied to the stage 37a is the stage 37a. By sufficiently decelerating near the center in the lateral direction and flowing downward, it is easy for a ball to enter the predetermined through winning portion 171. Therefore, when the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down toward the left region PA2 on the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper region PA1, the game is played toward the right region PA3. It is more likely that a ball will enter the predetermined through winning unit 171 than when the firing operation is performed so that the ball flows down.

The predetermined through winning portion 171 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole and is detected by the predetermined through detection sensor 171a, the predetermined through winning portion is detected by the main MPU 72. The occurrence of a prize in 171 is identified. Further, since the winning of the predetermined through winning section 171 is only passed through the through hole in the vertical direction, the game ball winning the predetermined through winning section 171 continues to flow down the game area PA. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball that has entered the predetermined through winning unit 171 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24. Further, when a prize is generated in the predetermined through winning section 171, three game balls are paid out for each game ball, but even if the number of payouts is other than three. It may be configured that the payout of the game ball is not often executed. The left side region PA2 is not provided with a ball winning portion including the through winning portion 34 and the special winning device 35 in the first embodiment.

A predetermined general electric device 172, a first non-electric device 173, a second non-electric device 177, and a third non-electric device 179 are provided in the right region PA3. These predetermined general electric devices 172, the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177, and the third non-electric device 179 cannot win a prize when the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side region PA2. There is, and a prize can be won by performing a firing operation so as to flow down the right side region PA3. The predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177, and the third non-electric device 179 are the predetermined general electric device 172 → the first non-electric device 173 → the second in the right region PA3 from the upstream side. The non-electric device 177 → the third non-electric device 179 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals.

The predetermined utility device 172 is provided with a predetermined utility accessory 172a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the predetermined general electric accessory 172a, the game ball cannot win the predetermined general electric device 172, and when the predetermined general electric accessory 172a is opened, the predetermined general electric device 172 can be won. Both the predetermined utility drive unit 172b for opening and closing the predetermined utility object 172a and the predetermined utility detection sensor 172c for detecting the game ball winning the predetermined utility device 172 are electrically connected to the main control device 70. ing. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the predetermined utility drive unit 172b, the predetermined utility accessory 172a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the predetermined utility accessory 172a is closed. Return to. Further, the main MPU 72 grasps whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined general electric device 172 based on the detection result of the predetermined general electric detection sensor 172c. When a prize is awarded to the predetermined electric device 172, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball, but the number of payouts may be other than 15.

The first non-electric device 173 is provided with a first guide piece 173a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the first guide piece 173a is closed, the game ball cannot win the first non-electric device 173, and when the first guide piece 173a is opened, the first non-electric device 173 can be won. A drive unit for opening and closing the first guide piece 173a is not provided. Instead, the game ball winning the predetermined electric device 172 abuts on the first opening operation mechanism 173b provided in the first non-electric device 173 through the first guide passage 174, and the first opening operation mechanism 173b is displaced. By doing so, the first guide piece 173a is opened, and the game ball winning the first non-electric device 173 is provided in the first non-electric device 173 in the process of heading to the second non-electric device 177 through the second guide passage 175. The first guide piece 173a is closed when the first closing operation mechanism 173c is displaced by abutting against the first closing operation mechanism 173c.

The game ball that has won a prize in the predetermined general electric device 172, is guided to the first opening operation mechanism 173b by the first induction passage 174, and comes into contact with the first opening operation mechanism 173b, is second non-electricized by the discharge passage 176. It is discharged to a side different from the device 177 side. Further, when the first guide piece 173a is opened by the first opening operation mechanism 173b, the first closing operation mechanism 173c returns to the initial position, and the first guide piece 173a is closed by the first closing operation mechanism 173c. When the state is reached, the first opening operation mechanism 173b returns to the initial position. Further, even if the first guide piece 173a is already in the open state and the game ball enters the predetermined electric device 172 and the game ball comes into contact with the first open operation mechanism 173b, the first guide piece 173b is in contact with the game ball. 1 The open state of the guide piece 173a is maintained.

The game ball that has won the first non-electric device 173 will flow down toward the second non-electric device 177 through the second guide passage 175 as described above, but the first non-electric device 175 is located upstream of the second guide passage 175. A first non-electric detection sensor 173d for detecting a winning game ball is provided in the non-electric device 173. The first non-electric detection sensor 173d is electrically connected to the main control device 70, and the main MPU 72 enters the game ball into the first non-electric detection sensor 173 based on the detection result of the first non-electric detection sensor 173d. Grasp the presence or absence of a ball. When a prize is generated in the first non-electric device 173, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball, but the number of payouts may be other than 15. .. It should be noted that the game ball that has won a prize in the predetermined general electric device 172, passes through the first guide passage 174, and is discharged by the discharge passage 176 is not detected by the first non-electric detection sensor 173d.

The second non-electric device 177 is provided with a second guide piece 177a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the second guide piece 177a is closed, the game ball cannot win the second non-electric device 177, and when the second guide piece 177a is opened, the second non-electric device 177 can be won. A drive unit for opening and closing the second guide piece 177a is not provided. Instead, the game ball winning the first non-electric device 173 comes into contact with the second opening operation mechanism 177b provided in the second non-electric device 177 through the second guide passage 175, and the second opening operation mechanism 177b Due to the displacement, the second guide piece 177a is opened, and the game ball winning the second non-electric device 177 is provided in the second non-electric device 177 in the process of heading toward the third non-electric device 179 through the third guide passage 178. The second guide piece 177a is closed by abutting on the second closing operation mechanism 177c and displacement of the second closing operation mechanism 177c.

The game ball that has won the first non-electric device 173 and is guided by the second opening operation mechanism 177b by the second induction passage 175 and abuts on the second opening operation mechanism 177b is the third non-third by the discharge passage 176. It is discharged to a side different from the electric device 179 side. When the second guide piece 177a is opened by the second opening operation mechanism 177b, the second closing operation mechanism 177c returns to the initial position, and the second guide piece 177a is closed by the second closing operation mechanism 177c. When the state is reached, the second opening operation mechanism 177b returns to the initial position. Further, when two or more game balls enter the first non-electric device 173 at the same time, the game balls come into contact with the second opening operation mechanism 177b in a situation where the second guide piece 177a is already in the open state. Even if this is done, the open state of the second guide piece 177a is maintained.

The game ball that has won the second non-electric device 177 will flow down toward the third non-electric device 179 through the third guide passage 178 as described above, but the third guide passage 178 is located upstream of the third guide passage 178. A second non-electric detection sensor 177d for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the non-electric device 177 is provided. The second non-electric detection sensor 177d is electrically connected to the main control device 70, and the main MPU 72 enters the game ball into the second non-electric detection sensor 177 based on the detection result of the second non-electric detection sensor 177d. Grasp the presence or absence of a ball. When a prize is awarded to the second non-electric device 177, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball, but the number of payouts may be other than 15. .. The game ball that wins the first non-electric device 173, passes through the second guide passage 175, and is discharged by the discharge passage 176 is not detected by the second non-electric detection sensor 177d.

The third non-electric device 179 is provided with a third guide piece 179a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the third guide piece 179a is closed, the game ball cannot win the third non-electric device 179, and when the third guide piece 179a is opened, the third non-electric device 179 can be won. A drive unit for opening and closing the third guide piece 179a is not provided. Instead, the game ball winning the second non-electric device 177 comes into contact with the third opening operation mechanism 179b provided in the third non-electric device 179 through the third guide passage 178, and the third opening operation mechanism 179b Due to the displacement, the third guide piece 179a is opened, and the game ball winning the third non-electric device 179 is provided in the third non-electric device 179 in the process of moving downward through the downstream discharge passage 181. When the third closing operation mechanism 179c is displaced in contact with the closing operation mechanism 179c, the third guide piece 179a is closed.

The game ball that has won a prize in the second non-electric device 177, is guided to the third opening operation mechanism 179b by the third induction passage 178, and comes into contact with the third opening operation mechanism 179b is discharged downstream by the discharge passage 176. It is discharged to a side different from the passage 181 side. Further, when the third guide piece 179a is opened by the third opening operation mechanism 179b, the third closing operation mechanism 179c returns to the initial position, and the third guide piece 179a is closed by the third closing operation mechanism 179c. When the state is reached, the third opening operation mechanism 179b returns to the initial position. Further, since two or more game balls enter the second non-electric device 177 at the same time, the game balls come into contact with the third opening operation mechanism 179b in a situation where the third guide piece 179a is already in the open state. Even if this is done, the open state of the third guide piece 179a is maintained.

The game ball winning the third non-electric device 179 will flow downward through the downstream discharge passage 181 as described above, but the third non-electric device is located upstream of the downstream discharge passage 181. A third non-electric detection sensor 179d for detecting the winning game ball is provided in the device 179. The third non-electric detection sensor 179d is electrically connected to the main control device 70, and the main MPU 72 enters the game ball into the third non-electric detection sensor 179 based on the detection result of the third non-electric detection sensor 179d. Grasp the presence or absence of a ball. When a prize is awarded to the third non-electric device 179, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball, but the number of payouts may be other than 15. .. The game ball that wins the second non-electric device 177, passes through the third guide passage 178, and is discharged by the discharge passage 176 is not detected by the third non-electric detection sensor 179d.

A predetermined normal map display unit 182 and a predetermined normal map hold display unit 183 are provided in an area on the lower right side of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The predetermined normal figure display unit 182 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is impossible for the predetermined normal figure display unit 182 to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 51, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the predetermined normal figure display unit 182. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the pattern displayed on the predetermined normal map display unit 182, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types A configuration in which colors are displayed can be considered. Further, the display range of the predetermined normal map display unit 182 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Further, the display range for both the predetermined normal figure display unit 182 and the predetermined normal figure hold display unit 183 is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the symbol display device 51 as compared with the predetermined normal figure display unit 182 and the predetermined normal figure hold display unit 183.

Based on the fact that the game ball enters the predetermined through winning unit 171, the predetermined normal drawing display unit 182 performs the display continuation times including the variable display of the pattern. Further, the predetermined normal figure holding display unit 183 is provided at a position adjacent to the predetermined normal figure display unit 182. Up to 4 pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls winning in the predetermined through winning unit 171 are reserved as the predetermined normal drawing side holding information, and the holding number is displayed by lighting the predetermined normal drawing holding display unit 183. It has become. Although not shown, the main RAM 74 is provided with a predetermined normal drawing holding area as an area for storing the predetermined normal drawing side holding information. The configuration of the predetermined normal figure holding area is the same as that of the first normal figure holding area 141 in the fourth embodiment, and the numerical information of the normal number counter C11 is stored as the predetermined normal figure side holding information, and further, the predetermined normal figure holding area is stored. In the display continuation times of the display unit 182, up to four predetermined normal drawing side hold information that is not the execution target of the display continuation times is held and stored.

<Flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 (a) shows a period during which the display continuation times on the predetermined normal figure display unit 182 are executed, and FIG. 53 (b) shows a period during which the predetermined normal electric device 172 is in the open state. c) shows the timing at which a prize is generated in the predetermined electric device 172, FIG. 53 (d) shows the period during which the first non-electric device 173 is in the open state, and FIG. 53 (e) shows the first non-electric device. The timing at which a prize is generated in the electric device 173 is shown, FIG. 53 (f) shows the period during which the second non-electric device 177 is in the open state, and FIG. 53 (g) shows the period in which the second non-electric device 177 is in the open state. The timing at which the prize is generated is shown, FIG. 53 (h) shows the period during which the third non-electric device 179 is in the open state, and FIG. 53 (i) shows the timing at which the third non-electric device 179 is awarded. Is shown.

When a prize is generated in the predetermined through winning unit 171, the display continuation times in the predetermined normal drawing display unit 182 are performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 53 (a). Since this display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the open execution state of the predetermined power supply device 172, it is predetermined from the timing of t2 to the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 53 (b) after the display continuation time is completed. The general electric device 172 is opened. When the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened, the player changes the firing operation in which the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 to the firing operation in which the game ball flows down in the right side area PA3. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the predetermined general electric device 172.

As shown in FIG. 53 (c), a prize is generated for the predetermined general electric device 172 at the timing of t3 in the middle of the state where the predetermined general electric device 172 is in the open state. When a prize is generated in the predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173 is opened at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 53 (d). Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), a prize is generated in the first non-electric device 173. When the first non-electric device 173 is won, the first non-electric device 173 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 53 (d), and FIG. 53 (f) shows. As shown in the above, the second non-electric device 177 changes from the closed state to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 53 (g), a prize is generated for the second non-electric device 177 at the timing of t6 in which the second non-electric device 177 is in the open state. When the second non-electric device 177 is won, the second non-electric device 177 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 53 (f), and FIG. As shown in the above, the third non-electric device 179 changes from the closed state to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 53 (i), a prize is generated for the third non-electric device 179 at the timing of t7 in which the third non-electric device 179 is in the open state. When a prize is generated for the third non-electric device 179, the third non-electric device 179 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 53 (h).

As described above, when one game ball enters the predetermined general electric device 172, not only 15 game balls are paid out, but also the first non-electric device 173 is opened. Further, when one game ball enters the open first non-electric device 173, not only 15 game balls are paid out, but also the first non-electric device 173 is closed. At the same time, the second non-electric device 177 is opened. In addition, when one game ball enters the open second non-electric device 177, not only 15 game balls are paid out, but also the second non-electric device 177 is closed. At the same time, the third non-electric device 179 is opened. Further, when one game ball enters the open third non-electric device 179, 15 game balls are paid out, and the third non-electric device 179 is further closed. In this way, after one game ball is inserted into the predetermined general electric device 172, the game ball is inserted into each in the order of the first non-electric device 173 → the second non-electric device 177 → the third non-electric device 179. By making the ball, at least 60 game balls are paid out. Then, when the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3, the predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177, and the third non-electric device 179. There is a high probability that a game ball will win a prize in an open device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game balls owned by the player by performing the above one cycle.

When the predetermined utility device 172 is in the open execution state, the details will be described later, but the predetermined utility device 172 is in the open state a plurality of times with a predetermined closing continuation period in between. Therefore, from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10, the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened again as shown in FIG. 53 (b). Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), a prize is generated for the predetermined general electric device 172 at the timing of t9 in the middle of the state where the predetermined general electric device 172 is in the open state. When a prize is generated for the predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173 is opened at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 53 (d). In this case, the occurrence of winning the first non-electric device 173 is delayed due to the clogging of the game ball in the upper plate 65a, and finally the first as shown in FIG. 53 (e) at the timing of t11. A prize is generated for the non-electric device 173.

As a result of the winning of the first non-electric device 173, the first non-electric device 173 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 53 (d), and FIG. 53 (f) shows. As shown in the above, the second non-electric device 177 changes from the closed state to the open state. In this case, the occurrence of winning the second non-electric device 177 is delayed due to the occurrence of clogging of the game ball in the upper plate 65a again. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the next opening times of the predetermined general electric device 172 are started at the timing of t12 in which the second non-electric device 177 is still in the open state. That is, in this situation, both the predetermined general electric device 172 and the second non-electric device 177 are in the open state. In the right area PA3, since the predetermined general electric device 172 is provided on the upstream side of the second non-electric device 177, a prize is more likely to occur in the predetermined general electric device 172 than the second non-electric device 177. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), at the timing of t13, a prize is generated in the predetermined general electric device 172 before the second non-electric device 177.

When a prize is generated in the predetermined electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173 is opened at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 53 (d). That is, in this situation, each of the predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173, and the second non-electric device 177 is in an open state. After that, at the timing of t14, the predetermined general electric device 172 is closed as shown in FIG. 53 (b). In this situation, both the first non-electric device 173 and the second non-electric device 177 are in the open state. Since the first non-electric device 173 is provided on the upstream side of the second non-electric device 177 in the right region PA3, a prize is more likely to occur in the first non-electric device 173 than in the second non-electric device 177. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), a prize is generated in the first non-electric device 173 before the second non-electric device 177 at the timing of t15.

When a prize is generated for the first non-electric device 173, the first non-electric device 173 is closed at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 53 (d). However, since the second non-electric device 177 is already in the open state, the open state of the second non-electric device 177 is maintained even if a prize is generated for the first non-electric device 173.

After that, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 53 (g), a prize is generated in the second non-electric device 177. As a result of the winning of the second non-electric device 177, the second non-electric device 177 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 53 (f), and FIG. 53 (h) shows. As shown in the above, the third non-electric device 179 changes from the closed state to the open state. Then, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 53 (i), a prize is generated in the third non-electric device 179. When a prize is generated for the third non-electric device 179, the third non-electric device 179 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 53 (h).

As described above, the predetermined general electric device 172 → the first non-electric device 173 → the second non-electric device 177 → the third non-electric device 179. When a new prize is generated, the one cycle being executed is substantially ended in the middle. Then, the number of game balls to be paid out to the player will be reduced by that amount. In the present embodiment, a configuration for suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience is adopted. The configuration will be described later.

<Fuzu Fuden control processing>
Next, the Fuzu Fuden control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. In the normal map normal power control process, the execution control of the display continuous times in the predetermined normal figure display unit 182 and the execution control of the open execution state of the predetermined normal power device 172 are performed. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose electric power control process in the present embodiment.

When a prize has been generated in the predetermined through winning unit 171 (step S3301: YES), the number of predetermined normal drawing side reserved information stored in the predetermined normal drawing holding area is less than the maximum number of four. (Step S3302: NO), the storage process in the predetermined normal figure holding area is executed (step S3303). The processing content of the storage process is the same as the storage process (step S1103) of the first normal figure general control process (FIG. 24) in the first normal figure holding area in the fourth embodiment.

When a negative determination is made in step S3301, an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, or the process of step S3303 is executed, the general-purpose electric address table stored in the main ROM 73 is read out (step S3304). .. In the Fuzu Fuden address table, the start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is set. The Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the processing content to be executed in the Fuzu Fuden control process.

The Fuzu Fuden counter can take values from "0" to "4", and each value from "0" to "4" corresponds to the start addresses NA0 to NA4 of each process (step S3307 to step S3311). are doing. Specifically, when the value of the normal map normal power counter is "0", the normal figure fluctuation start process (step S3307), which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the predetermined normal figure display unit 182, is executed. When the value of the normal map normal power counter is "1", the normal figure change processing (step S3308), which is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the predetermined normal figure display unit 182, is the target to be executed. When the value of the normal map normal power counter is "2", the normal figure finalizing process (step S3309), which is a process for ending the display continuation times in the predetermined normal figure display unit 182, is executed. When the value of the normal power counter is "3", the normal power opening process (step S3310), which is a process for controlling the open state of the predetermined normal power device 172, is executed, and the normal power counter is executed. When the value of is "4", the processing during closing of the normal power (step S3311), which is the processing for controlling the closed state of the predetermined normal power device 172, is the execution target.

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, after reading the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S3304), the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is acquired from the Fuzu Fuden address table (step S3305). , Jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S3306). Hereinafter, each process of steps S3307 to S3311 will be described individually.

<Public map fluctuation start processing>
First, the normal map fluctuation start process in step S3307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55.

In the normal map fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the predetermined normal map side hold information is stored (step S3401: YES) (step S3402). The processing content of the data setting process is the same as the data setting process (step S702) of the normal map fluctuation start process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment. As a result, the predetermined normal map side hold information stored in the first area of the predetermined normal map hold area is shifted to the execution area for the normal map in the predetermined normal map hold area.

After executing the data setting process, the open determination process is executed (step S3403). In the open determination process, the open determination table is read from the main ROM 73, and the read open determination table is subjected to the general electric random number counter C11 in the predetermined general map side hold information for which the current open determination process is executed. Collate the numerical information of. In this case, there is a 1/100 chance that the winning result will be open.

When the result of the open determination process is the open winning result (step S3404: YES), the stop result setting process for the open winning result is executed (step S3405). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the open winning result to be finally stopped and displayed in the current display continuation times on the predetermined normal figure display unit 182 is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. It should be noted that one type of stop mode may be set for the open winning result, or a plurality of types of stop modes for the open winning result may be set.

If the result of the open determination process is not the open winning result (step S3404: NO), the stop result setting process for the off result is executed (step S3406). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern for the disengagement result to be finally stopped and displayed on the predetermined normal figure display unit 182 at the current display continuation time is read from the main ROM 73 and stored in the main RAM 74. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the open winning result.

After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the specific process of the normal map fluctuation period is executed (step S3407). In the specific process, it is first determined whether or not the display continuation time this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. Specifically, if the display continuation times this time correspond to the open winning result, it is determined that the reach effect will occur. Further, even if the display continuation times this time do not correspond to the open winning result, the value of the reach random number counter C12 (see FIG. 23) is acquired, and the value of the acquired reach random number counter C12 causes the reach to occur. If it is the corresponding numerical information, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. When it is determined that the reach effect is generated, the reach generation table is read from the main ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the variation type counter C14 (see FIG. 23) is collated with the read reach generation table. The display duration is determined, and the determined display duration information is set in the timer counter provided in the main RAM 74. When it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, the non-reach table is read from the main ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the variation type counter C14 (see FIG. 23) is obtained for the read non-reach table. The display continuation period is determined by collating the combination of the number of current predetermined display continuation information, and the determined display continuation period information is set in the timer counter provided in the main RAM 74. When the reach generation table is referenced, the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter C14 is selected regardless of the number of reserved information on the predetermined normal map side, whereas the reach non-generation table is referenced. In this case, the shorter the display duration is selected as the number of reserved information on the predetermined table side increases. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). By the way, the display continuation period that can be selected when the predetermined normal map side hold information triggers the start of the display continuation times is 1 second to 180 seconds.

After that, the fluctuation start command corresponding to the result of the open determination process and the determined display duration information is read from the main ROM 73 and transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 92 (step S3408). The sound / light side MPU 92 executes control so that the effect of continuous display rotation corresponding to the received fluctuation start command is executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. In addition, in the symbol display device 51, as the effect for continuous display, the same effect as the effect for game times in the first embodiment is executed.

After that, the variable display of the pattern on the predetermined normal map display unit 182 is started (step S3409). A variable display table for normal drawings is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as a table referred to by the main MPU 72 when the predetermined normal drawing display unit 182 causes the variable display of the pattern to be displayed. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the predetermined normal map display unit 182, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the open determination process. When the variable display of the pattern is performed on the predetermined normal map display unit 182, the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the regular figure shows the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. The control data for one lap in is set. Therefore, when the predetermined normal map display unit 182 performs the variable display of the pattern, the variable display table for the normal map is repeatedly used until immediately before the final display is performed.

After that, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1 (step S3410). Since the value of the normal map fluctuation start process is "0" when the normal map fluctuation start processing is executed, the value of the normal map normal power counter is changed to the normal map fluctuation processing (step S3308) by adding 1. It becomes the corresponding "1".

<Processing during fluctuation of general map>
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map in step S3308 in the normal drawing control process (FIG. 54) will be described.

In the normal map fluctuation processing, it is determined whether or not the display is being continuously rotated and the timing is before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the timer counter measuring the display continuation period of the current display continuation times is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before the final display. Before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the predetermined normal map display unit 182 is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final display. Further, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not the opening determination process is performed. Further, when it is time to confirm the display, the display mode of the pattern on the predetermined normal map display unit 182 is set to the display mode corresponding to the determination result of the opening determination process this time. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the normal map normal electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the normal figure changing process to the one corresponding to the normal figure finalizing process (step S3309).

<Processing during confirmation of general map>
Next, the process during confirmation of the normal figure in step S3309 in the normal figure general control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56.

By determining whether or not the value of the timer counter that measures the display continuation period of the current display continuation time is "0", the final display period of the current display continuation time (specifically, 0. It is determined whether or not 4 seconds) has elapsed (step S3501). When the confirmed display period has elapsed (step S3501: YES), it is determined whether or not the result of the open determination process in the current display continuation time is the open winning result (step S3502). If it is not the open winning result (step S3502: NO), after clearing the value of the normal drawing counter to "0" (step S3503), the processing during confirmation of the normal drawing is terminated. As a result, in the next normal map normal electric control process (FIG. 54), the normal figure fluctuation start process (step S3307) is to be executed.

When the result is an open winning result (step S3502: YES), "20" is set as information on the number of times of opening / closing of the predetermined general electric device 172 in the general electric opening counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3504). Further, "10" is set in the general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 as information on the maximum number of winnings to the predetermined general electric device 172 in the open execution state this time (step S3505). Further, information corresponding to 0.3 seconds is set in the timer counter as information on the open continuation period of the predetermined electric power device 172 (step S3506). Since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, the number of game balls that can win a prize in the predetermined power device 172 is about one in one opening time of the predetermined power device 172.

Further, by starting the output of the drive signal to the predetermined general electric drive unit 172b, the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened (step S3507). In addition, a normal power start command indicating that the open execution state of the predetermined normal power device 172 has been started is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3508). By receiving the normal power start command, the sound light side MPU 92 makes the player aware that the open execution state of the predetermined normal power device 172 has been started. The symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the display light emitting unit 63 It is started by the speaker unit 64.

After that, the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1. In this case, since the value of the normal drawing counter is "2" when the normal drawing finalizing process is executed, it becomes "3" corresponding to the normal drawing opening process (step S3310) after 1 addition. ..

<Processing while the public train is open>
Next, the process during the opening of the normal power in step S3310 in the normal power control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

When a prize has been generated in the predetermined power device 172 (step S3601: YES), the value corresponding to the number of prizes is subtracted from the value of the power prize counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3602). In addition, when the value of the general electric prize counter becomes "0", no further subtraction is performed. In addition, a general electric winning command in which information corresponding to the current number of winnings to the predetermined general electric device 172 is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3603). By receiving the general electric winning command, the sound light side MPU 92 grasps the number of winnings this time to the predetermined general electric device 172, and the corresponding effect is applied to the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. To be executed.

When the value of the normal power winning counter after subtraction is "0" (step S3604: YES), the predetermined normal power device 172 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the predetermined normal power drive unit 172b. (Step S3605). After that, the value of the normal power release counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). In addition, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0" (step S3607). As a result, in the next normal map normal electric control process (FIG. 54), the normal figure fluctuation start process (step S3307) is to be executed. After that, the normal power end command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3608). By receiving the general electric power end command, the sound light side MPU 92 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined general electric power device 172 has ended. It is executed in the part 64.

When a negative determination is made in step S3601 or a negative determination is made in step S3604, this predetermined normal power is determined by determining whether or not the value of the timer counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not the open continuation period in the open times of the device 172 has elapsed (step S3609). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3609, the predetermined general electric device 172 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the predetermined general electric drive unit 172b (step S3610).

After that, the value of the normal power release counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3611), and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power release counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3612). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3612, the value of the general electric winning counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3613). In addition, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0" (step S3614). As a result, in the next normal map normal electric control process (FIG. 54), the normal figure fluctuation start process (step S3307) is to be executed. After that, the normal power end command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3615). By receiving the general electric power end command, the sound light side MPU 92 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined general electric power device 172 has ended. It is executed in the part 64.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S3612, information corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 74 as information on the closing duration of the predetermined power device 172 (step S3616). The closing duration of 2 seconds is longer than 3 times the firing cycle of the game ball. When the launching operation of the game ball is continued so as to flow down the right area PA3, the first non-electric device 173 is opened after the prize is generated in the predetermined general electric device 172, and the first non-electric device 173 is opened. The second non-electric device 177 is in an open state when a prize is generated, and the third non-electric device 179 is in an open state when a prize is generated in the second non-electric device 177. The period is slightly longer than the shortest period assumed as the period required for the device 179 to win a prize. Therefore, in the open execution state of the predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electricity is started from the end of one open turn of the predetermined general electric device 172 to the start of the next open turn of the predetermined general electric device 172. Each prize may or may not be completed in the order of device 173 → second non-electric device 177 → third non-electric device 179.

After that, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is added by 1 (step S3617). As a result, in the next Fuzu-fuden control process (FIG. 54), the Fuden-closed process (step S3311) becomes the execution target. After that, a general electric closing command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3618). By receiving the general electric power closing command, the sound light side MPU 92 grasps that the closing continuous period of the predetermined general electric power device 172 has started, and the corresponding effects are the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker. It is executed in the part 64.

<Processing while the public train is closed>
Next, the process during closing of the normal power in step S3311 in the normal power control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58.

If a prize is generated for the predetermined utility device 172 immediately before the predetermined utility device 172 is closed, it is specified that a prize is generated for the predetermined utility device 172 during the processing during the closure of the predetermined utility device. Will be done. Therefore, when a prize has been generated in the predetermined power supply device 172 (step S3701: YES), the value corresponding to the number of prizes is subtracted from the value of the power supply prize counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3702). In addition, when the value of the general electric prize counter becomes "0", no further subtraction is performed. In addition, a general electric winning command in which information corresponding to the current number of winnings to the predetermined general electric device 172 is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3703). By receiving the general electric winning command, the sound light side MPU 92 grasps the number of winnings this time to the predetermined general electric device 172, and the corresponding effect is applied to the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64. To be executed.

When the value of the general power winning counter after subtraction is "0" (step S3704: YES), the value of the general power release counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3705). In addition, the value of the Fuzu Fuden counter is cleared to "0" (step S3706). As a result, in the next normal map normal electric control process (FIG. 54), the normal figure fluctuation start process (step S3307) is to be executed. After that, the normal power end command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3707). By receiving the general electric power end command, the sound light side MPU 92 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined general electric power device 172 has ended. It is executed in the part 64.

When a negative determination is made in step S3701 or a negative determination is made in step S3704, this predetermined normal power is determined by determining whether or not the value of the timer counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not the closing duration of the closing times of the device 172 has elapsed (step S3708). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3708, information corresponding to 0.3 seconds is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 74 as information on the open continuation period of the predetermined power device 172 (step S3709). Then, by starting the output of the drive signal to the predetermined general electric drive unit 172b, the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened (step S3710).

After that, the Fuzu Fuden counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3711). In this case, since the value of the normal power counter is "4" when the normal power closing process is executed, it becomes "3" corresponding to the normal power opening processing (step S3310) after 1 subtraction. .. After that, the general power release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92 (step S3712). By receiving the general power release command, the sound light side MPU 92 grasps that a new opening time of the predetermined normal power device 172 has been started, and the corresponding effects are the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and It is executed by the speaker unit 64.

<Telegram notification processing>
Next, the telegram notification process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59. The telegram notification process is repeatedly activated in the sound light side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

When the general telegram start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3801: YES), the general telegram notification start process is executed (step S3802). In the start processing of the telegram notification, the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 execute an effect that allows the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined telegram device 172 is started. Execute the process to make it.

In this case, the sound light side MPU 92 transmits a normal power start command to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Upon receiving the general power start command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 ends the maximum number of winnings in the predetermined normal power device 172, which is a condition for ending the current open execution state, and the current open execution state. The symbol display device 51 displays an image that allows the player to recognize the upper limit of the number of times the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened, which is a condition for the player.

FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the image. As shown in FIG. 60A, the symbol display device 51 includes an image G1 indicating that the predetermined general electric device 172 is in the open execution state, and an image G2 indicating the number of remaining prizes in the predetermined general electric device 172. , Image G3 showing the remaining number of times the predetermined electric device 172 is opened is displayed. As a result, the player not only recognizes that the predetermined general electric device 172 is in the open execution state, but also the number of remaining prizes in the predetermined general electric device 172 in the current open execution state and the predetermined general electric device 172. It becomes possible to clearly recognize the remaining number of times of opening. When the opening execution state of the predetermined power device 172 is started, the first opening time of the predetermined power device 172 is started, so that the image G3 showing the remaining number of times the predetermined power device 172 is opened is used. , The image corresponding to "19" instead of "20" is displayed. In the open execution state of the predetermined general electric device 172, the opening effect may be executed over the opening period before the first opening times of the predetermined general electric device 172 are started. In this case, in the opening period, "20" is displayed as an image G3 indicating the remaining number of times of opening of the predetermined power device 172, and when the first opening time of the predetermined power device 172 is started, the image G3 is "20". 19 ”may be displayed.

Returning to the description of the general telegram notification process (FIG. 59), when the general telegram prize command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3803: YES), the update process of the remaining prize number notification is executed (step S3804). In the update process, a value subtracted by a number corresponding to the number of winnings in the predetermined universal device 172 is displayed as an image G2 indicating the number of remaining winnings in the predetermined universal device 172.

When the general electric power closing command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3805: YES), the closing period notification start processing is executed (step S3806). In the closing period notification start process, the sound-light side MPU 92 transmits a general electric closing command to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 displays on the symbol display device 51 an image that allows the player to recognize the remaining closing duration of the predetermined normal power device 172 at the current closing time by receiving the general power closing command. Let me.

FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the image. As shown in FIG. 60B, the symbol display device 51 includes an image G1 indicating that the predetermined general electric device 172 is in the open execution state, an image G2 indicating the number of remaining prizes in the predetermined general electric device 172, and an image G2. Not only the image G3 showing the remaining number of times the predetermined electric device 172 is opened, but also the image G4 showing the remaining closing duration in the current closing time is displayed. As the image G4 showing the remaining closure duration, a meter display in which the length of the band display with respect to the frame display becomes shorter with the passage of time is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a time countdown display is performed. May be configured, or the time count-up display may be performed.

Returning to the explanation of the telegram notification process (FIG. 59), in the situation where the image G4 indicating the closure continuation period is displayed (step S3807: YES), is it the update timing of the image G4 indicating the closure continuation period? It is determined whether or not (step S3808). Specifically, the update timing is set every 0.1 seconds. When the update timing is reached (step S3808: YES), the closing period notification update process is executed (step S3809). In the update process, an update command is transmitted to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Upon receiving the update command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 updates the display content of the image G4 indicating the remaining closure duration of the symbol display device 51 to the display content corresponding to the elapse of 0.1 seconds. ..

When the general power release command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3810: YES), the update process of the remaining release count notification is executed (step S3811). In the update process, the value subtracted by 1 is displayed as an image G3 indicating the remaining number of times the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened. In addition, the closing process of the closing period notification is executed (step S3812). As a result, the display of the image G4 indicating the remaining closing duration on the symbol display device 51 is terminated.

When the general telegram end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3813: YES), the general telegram notification end process is executed (step S3814). In the termination process of the telegram notification, the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 execute an effect that allows the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined telegram device 172 ends. Execute the process to make it. In this case, the sound / light side MPU 92 transmits a normal power end command to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. By receiving the general electric power end command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 ends the display of each of the above images G1 to G3 corresponding to the open execution state of the predetermined general electric power device 172, and enters the normal gaming state. The display of the corresponding image is restarted on the symbol display device 51.

<Action by executing telegram notification>
Next, the action of executing the telegram notification on the symbol display device 51 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 61 (a) shows a period during which the display continuation times on the predetermined normal figure display unit 182 are executed, and FIG. 61 (b) shows a period during which the predetermined normal electric device 172 is in the open state. c) shows the timing at which a prize is generated in the predetermined electric device 172, FIG. 61 (d) shows the period during which the first non-electric device 173 is in the open state, and FIG. 61 (e) shows the first non-electric device. The timing at which a prize is generated in the electric device 173 is shown, FIG. 61 (f) shows the period during which the second non-electric device 177 is in the open state, and FIG. 61 (g) shows the period in which the second non-electric device 177 is in the open state. The timing at which the prize is generated is shown, FIG. 61 (h) shows the period during which the third non-electric device 179 is in the open state, and FIG. 61 (i) shows the timing at which the third non-electric device 179 is awarded. Is shown.

When a prize is generated in the predetermined through winning unit 171, the display continuation times in the predetermined normal drawing display unit 182 are performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 61 (a). Since this display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the open execution state of the predetermined power device 172, it is predetermined from the timing of t2 to the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 61B after the display continuation time is completed. The general electric device 172 is opened. When the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened, the player changes the firing operation in which the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 to the firing operation in which the game ball flows down in the right side area PA3. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the predetermined general electric device 172. Further, at the timing of t2, the image G1 showing that the predetermined general electric device 172 is in the open execution state in the symbol display device 51, the image G2 showing the number of remaining prizes in the predetermined general electric device 172, and the predetermined general electric device 172. The display of the image G3 (see FIG. 60A) indicating the remaining number of times of opening of the image G3 is started.

As shown in FIG. 61 (c), a prize is generated for the predetermined general electric device 172 at the timing of t3 in the middle of the state where the predetermined general electric device 172 is in the open state. When a prize is generated in the predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173 is opened at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 61 (d). After that, at the timing of t4, the predetermined general electric device 172 is closed as shown in FIG. 61 (b). In this case, the symbol display device 51 starts displaying the image G4 (see FIG. 60B) indicating the remaining closing duration in the current closing time. As a result, the player can grasp the remaining period until the predetermined electric device 172 is opened next.

After that, the occurrence of winning the first non-electric device 173 was delayed due to the clogging of the game ball on the upper plate 65a, and finally the first non-electric device was finally shown at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 61 (e). A prize is generated for the device 173. When the first non-electric device 173 is won, the first non-electric device 173 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 61 (d), and FIG. 61 (f) shows. As shown in the above, the second non-electric device 177 changes from the closed state to the open state. On the other hand, the occurrence of winning the second non-electric device 177 is delayed due to the occurrence of clogging of the game ball in the upper plate 65a again. Then, as shown in FIG. 61B, the next opening times of the predetermined general electric device 172 are started at the timing of t6 in which the second non-electric device 177 is still in the open state.

Here, the open execution state of the predetermined general electric device 172 is a predetermined general electric power that is an end condition of the open execution state, rather than the upper limit number of winning numbers in the predetermined general electric device 172 that is the end condition of the open execution state. The maximum number of times the device 172 is opened is set to be larger. Therefore, in a situation where the remaining number of times of opening the predetermined power device 172 is larger than the number of remaining prizes in the predetermined power device 172, one opening time of the predetermined power device 172 to the predetermined power device 172 is performed. Even if no prize is generated, it is possible to generate a prize for a maximum number of game balls in the predetermined general electric device 172 in the open execution state. In this case, in the open execution state of the predetermined universal device 172, the symbol display device 51 shows the image G2 showing the number of remaining winnings to the predetermined universal device 172 and the remaining number of times the predetermined utility device 172 is opened. Since the image G3 is displayed, the player can grasp whether or not it is necessary to make the predetermined general electric device 172 win the game ball at a predetermined opening time of the predetermined general electric device 172. Further, during the closing period of the predetermined general electric device 172, the image G4 indicating the remaining closing continuation period is displayed on the symbol display device 51. Therefore, the player can stop the firing of the game ball toward the predetermined general electric device 172 in advance before the new opening turn of the predetermined general electric device 172 is started. As a result, the game ball does not enter the predetermined electric device 172 in the middle of the cycle of winning the game ball in the order of the first non-electric device 173 → the second non-electric device 177 → the third non-electric device 179. It becomes possible to do so.

Specifically, in the case of FIG. 61, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), a predetermined normal electric power is applied from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, which is the timing in which the second non-electric device 177 is in the open state. Although the device 172 is in the open state, no prize is generated for the predetermined general electric device 172 at the opening times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the predetermined electric device 172 in the middle of the cycle.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (g), a prize is generated in the second non-electric device 177 at the timing of t8. When a prize is generated in the second non-electric device 177, the second non-electric device 177 is closed as shown in FIG. 61 (f) at the timing of t8, and as shown in FIG. 61 (h). The third non-electric device 179 is opened. Then, at the timing of t9, a prize is generated for the third non-electric device 179 as shown in FIG. 61 (i). When a prize is generated for the third non-electric device 179, the third non-electric device 179 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 53 (h).

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), a new opening time of the predetermined electric device 172 is executed from the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, and at the timing of t11, the predetermined normal is as shown in FIG. 61 (c). A prize is generated for the electric device 172. This allows. A new cycle is started as shown after the timing of t12.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The open execution state of the predetermined general electric device 172 is more than the upper limit of the number of winnings in the predetermined general electric device 172 which is the end condition of the open execution state of the predetermined general electric device 172 which is the end condition of the open execution state. The maximum number of times of opening is larger. As a result, even if one or more game balls are not inserted into the predetermined utility device 172 at each execution time in the open execution state of the predetermined utility device 172, the upper limit number of balls can be obtained in the open execution state of the predetermined utility device 172. It is possible to put the game ball into the predetermined electric device 172. In this case, in the open execution state of the predetermined utility device 172, the player pays attention to the number of times the predetermined utility device 172 is opened to determine whether or not the upper limit number of game balls enter the predetermined utility device 172. While making predictions, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Since the opening duration of one opening time of the predetermined power device 172 is set to 0.3 seconds, a game in which the predetermined power device 172 can win a prize in one opening time of the predetermined power device 172. The number of balls is about one, and it is possible that the game balls do not enter the predetermined general electric device 172 in one opening time of the predetermined general electric device 172. In this case, since the upper limit number of times is larger than the upper limit number as described above, the player can transfer the upper limit number of game balls to the predetermined normal electric device 172 in the open execution state of the predetermined general electric device 172. Whether or not to enter the ball is predicted while paying attention to the number of times the predetermined electric device 172 is opened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the open execution state of the predetermined utility device 172, the image G2 showing the number of remaining winnings to the predetermined utility device 172 on the symbol display device 51 and the image G3 showing the remaining number of times the predetermined utility device 172 is opened are displayed. Is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not it is necessary to make the predetermined general electric device 172 win the game ball at the predetermined opening times of the predetermined general electric device 172. Then, by performing the grasp, the game ball is moved to the predetermined electric device 172 in the middle of the cycle in which the game ball is won in the order of the first non-electric device 173 → the second non-electric device 177 → the third non-electric device 179. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering.

During the closing period of the predetermined universal device 172 in the open execution state of the predetermined utility device 172, the symbol display device 51 displays an image G4 indicating the remaining closing continuation period. Therefore, the player can stop the firing of the game ball toward the predetermined general electric device 172 in advance before the new opening turn of the predetermined general electric device 172 is started.

<Another form of the twelfth embodiment>
(1) Multiple types so that the relationship between the upper limit of the number of winning balls to the predetermined normal electric device 172 in the case of a big hit state and the upper limit of the number of times the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened is different. The jackpot state may be set. In this case, the upper limit number is larger than the upper limit number in any of the jackpot states, but the difference may be different depending on the type of jackpot state, and the upper limit number and the upper limit number of times may be different. Although the difference is the same, the upper limit number and the upper limit number of times may be different depending on the type of jackpot state. Further, in the first jackpot state, the upper limit number is larger than the upper limit number, in the second jackpot state, the upper limit number and the upper limit number are the same, and in the third jackpot state, the upper limit number is larger than the upper limit number. It may be configured with few. As a result, it is possible to make the player's advantage different depending on the type of jackpot state.

(2) In the open execution state of the predetermined general electric device 172, a notification indicating the number of remaining winnings in the predetermined general electric device 172, a notification indicating the remaining number of times the predetermined general electric device 172 is opened, and a predetermined general electric device Although the notification indicating the remaining closure duration of 172 is performed by the symbol display device 51, a part of these notifications may be performed by a device other than the symbol display device 51. Each of the notifications may be performed on a dedicated display unit.

(3) At least one of the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177, and the third non-electric device 179 is configured such that switching between the open state and the closed state is performed by electric drive. Good. For example, in a configuration in which the first non-electric device 173 is electrically driven, when one game ball enters the predetermined electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173 is opened and the first non-electric device 173 is opened. The first non-electric device 173 is controlled to be closed when one game ball enters the non-electric device 173. Further, in the configuration in which the second non-electric device 177 is electrically driven, when one game ball enters the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177 is opened and the second non-electric device 177 is opened. The second non-electric device 177 is controlled to be closed when one game ball enters the non-electric device 177. Further, in the configuration in which the third non-electric device 179 is electrically driven, when one game ball enters the second non-electric device 177, the third non-electric device 179 is opened and the third non-electric device 179 is opened. When one game ball enters the 3 non-electric device 179, the third non-electric device 179 is controlled to be closed.

(4) The number of game balls that can be won in the predetermined general electric device 172 is not limited to about one in the one-time open state of the predetermined general electric device 172, and in the one-time open state. A plurality of game balls may be inserted into the predetermined electric device 172. Even with this configuration, the first non-electric device 173 is opened for the entry of one game ball into the predetermined general electric device 172, and the game ball enters the first non-electric device 173. Since the first non-electric device 173 is closed due to the above, it is preferable that the predetermined general device 172 is awarded only one game ball in the one-time open state of the predetermined general device 172. ..

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. By the way, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment, and may be applied to an embodiment different from the illustrated embodiment. May be good.

(1) The special winning device 35 cannot win a prize in the non-accepted state and can win a prize when it is in the accepted state. However, instead of this, the special winning device 35 has a low probability even in the non-accepted state. Although the winning of the game ball may occur in the above, the winning of the game ball may be easily generated by being in the accepted state. In addition, the configuration is the first general electric device 121, the second general electric device 122, the third general electric device 123, the fourth general electric device 161 and the predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173, and the second non-electric device. It may be applied to the device 177 and the third non-electric device 179.

(2) When the first display continuation period is set as the display continuation period of the general drawing display units 39a and 134 corresponding to the special winning device 35, the special winning device 35 cannot be reliably won a prize. Alternatively, the special winning device 35 may be won with a predetermined probability, although the probability is lower than when the third display duration is set.

(3) In the first to tenth embodiments, a plurality of types of first display continuation periods are set in the display continuation times of the normal figure display units 39a and 134, and any of the situations in which the first display continuation period is set. The first display continuation period may be set by a lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the special winning device 35 cannot be won or is unlikely to be won regardless of which first display continuation period is set.

(4) In the first to tenth embodiments, a plurality of types of third display continuation periods are set in the display continuation times of the normal figure display units 39a and 134, and any of the situations in which the third display continuation period is set. The configuration may be such that whether to set the third display continuation period is determined by lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the special winning device 35 is prized at a predetermined frequency regardless of which third display continuation period is set. Further, in the configuration, the frequency of winning the special winning device 35 may differ depending on the type of the third display duration selected.

(5) In the first to tenth embodiments, the special winning device 35 is not limited to only one type of open execution state, and can be expected in one open execution state. A plurality of types of open execution states may be set so that the number of winnings to 35 is different.

(6) In the first to tenth embodiments, the game ball that has won the through winning unit 34 is configured to surely reach the position where the special winning device 35 can be won. The game ball that has won the through winning section 34 may reach a position where it is possible to win the special winning device 35 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the game ball that has won the through winning section 34 is the special winning device 35. It may be configured that the position where the prize can be won is not reached at a predetermined ratio, such as one out of ten.

(7) In the first to tenth embodiments, the predetermined hold information that triggers the start of the continuous display times is held and stored, which is advantageous for the player regarding the frequency of winning the special winning device 35. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not to give a profit to the player when a predetermined number or more of the predetermined hold information that triggers the start of the continuous display times is held and stored. The winning probability of the lottery process may be high, and if the predetermined hold information that triggers the start of the continuous display times is stored on hold, it will be paid out when the game ball enters the predetermined entry section. The number of game balls may be increased. In this case, the predetermined number may be one or two or more.

(8) In the sixth embodiment, in the situation where the display continuation times in the third general drawing display unit 133 are executed, the situation is set to be advantageous for the player with respect to the winning frequency to the special winning device 35. , Not limited to this, and may be configured to increase the winning probability of the lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a profit in the player's favor when the predetermined display continuation times are executed. , When a predetermined display continuation time is executed, the number of game balls to be paid out when a game ball enters a predetermined entry portion may be increased.

(9) In the first embodiment, there may be a configuration in which a plurality of through winning portions 34 are provided instead of one, such as two, three, four, or five or more. In this case, the plurality of through winning units 34 correspond to the trigger ball entering means in the first embodiment. Further, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of specific actuating portions 124 may be provided instead of one, such as two, three, four or five or more. In this case, the plurality of specific actuating units 124 correspond to the triggering ball means in the fourth embodiment. Further, in the tenth embodiment, a plurality of first general electric devices 121 may be provided instead of one, such as two, three, four or five or more. In this case, the plurality of first general electric devices 121 correspond to the triggering ball means in the tenth embodiment.

(10) The configurations of the above embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination, and the configurations of the above embodiments are applied to each other in any combination and then described in <Other Embodiments>. The configuration may be applied in any combination.

(11) It is impossible for the player to replenish the pachinko machine 10 with the game balls, the game balls circulate in the pachinko machine 10, and information on the number of game balls that can be used by the player is stored and retained. The configuration of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which a gaming ball can be launched within the range of information on the number of usable gaming balls that are stored in memory.

(12) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 70 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 100 is controlled by the voice emission control device 90 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 70. The device 100 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 90. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 70, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 70. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 70 to the voice emission control device 90 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are also arbitrary.

(13) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, in order to facilitate understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the configuration is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like. ..

<Feature A group>
Features A1. The first state (acceptance state) in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined ball entry section (discharge passage 42) or the ball entry is likely to occur, and the game ball cannot be entered into the predetermined ball entry section. Predetermined ball-entry means (special winning device 35) provided so as to be able to switch to the second state (non-acceptance state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter.
A predetermined control means (in the first embodiment, the process of step S907 in the main MPU 72 is executed) that causes the predetermined ball entry means to be in the first state when a predetermined period elapses from the occurrence of the predetermined trigger. A function, a function of executing the process of step S1409 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2406 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment), and
In the situation where the game ball is flowing down the game area in a predetermined mode for the predetermined period, the game is at a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion in the situation where the predetermined ball entry means is in the first state. A function of executing the process of step S806 in the main MPU 72 in the first setting means (in the first embodiment, in the first embodiment) for setting the first period (third display continuation period) that enables or facilitates the arrival of the sphere. In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1008 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1605 in the main MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, the step in the main MPU 72. A function of executing the process of S1705, a function of executing the process of step S2006 in the main MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2503 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment).
As the predetermined period, a position at which the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion in the situation where the game ball is flowing down the game area in the predetermined mode and the predetermined ball entry means is in the first state. A second setting means (in the first embodiment, the process of step S804 in the main MPU 72 is executed) for setting a second period (first display continuation period) that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to reach The function of executing the process of step S1004 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1604 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S1604 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S1704 in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the main MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2502 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment).
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, when the predetermined period elapses after the predetermined trigger occurs, the predetermined ball entry means is in the first state, so that it is possible to predict in advance that the predetermined ball entry means will be in the first state. It will be possible. In this case, when the first period is set as the predetermined period, the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry portion or the entry is likely to occur, whereas the predetermined period is set. When the second period is set, it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry portion, or the ball entry becomes difficult to occur. As a result, the player expects that the first period is set as a predetermined period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since it is possible to cause the above-mentioned situation by adjusting the predetermined period, the above-mentioned control for switching the predetermined ball entry means between the first state and the second state is not complicated. It is possible to achieve such an excellent effect.

Feature A2. The predetermined control means sets the predetermined ball entry means in the same manner as the first state regardless of whether the first period is set as the predetermined period or the second period is set. The gaming machine according to feature A1, which is characterized in that it does.

According to the feature A2, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while simplifying the control of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the first state and the second state.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the second period is shorter than the first period.

According to the feature A3, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, the game ball cannot enter the predetermined entry portion or the second period is relative in the configuration in which the entry is difficult to occur. By setting it for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being unable to enter the predetermined ball entry section or the situation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball to continue excessively. It becomes.

Feature A4. The first period is equal to or longer than the shortest supply cycle of the game ball to the game area, and the second period is shorter than the shortest supply cycle. The first aspect of the feature A1 to A3. Game machine.

According to the feature A4, in a situation where the first period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to expect that one or more game balls are supplied to the positions of the predetermined ball entry means and the like, while the predetermined period is set. In a situation where a second period is set as the period, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being wasted.

Feature A5. It is provided with an opportunity entry means (through winning section 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
The predetermined trigger is generated based on the fact that the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means.
The trigger ball entry means is provided on the upstream side of the game ball in the flow direction of the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means can enter the predetermined ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it can reach.

According to the feature A5, since the predetermined trigger is generated based on the game ball entering the trigger entry means, the occurrence of the predetermined trigger becomes clear to the player. In this case, the trigger ball entry means is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means can reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion. With this, it is possible to generate both the entry of the trigger entry means and the entry into the predetermined entry portion by one game ball.

Feature A6. The game machine according to feature A5, wherein the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means surely reaches a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion.

According to the feature A6, since it is easy to specify the timing when the game ball reaches the position where the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion with respect to the timing when the predetermined trigger occurs, the game ball to the predetermined ball entry portion for the setting of the predetermined period It becomes easier to adjust the ease of entering the ball.

Feature A7. The second period is a period shorter than the shortest period required for the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means to reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined entry portion. A5 Or the gaming machine according to A6.

According to the feature A7, when the predetermined period is set to the second period, the game ball that has caused the predetermined trigger by entering the trigger ball entry means is prevented from entering the predetermined ball entry portion. Is possible.

Feature A8. In the second period, when the measurement in the second period is started when a predetermined game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, the firing order one before the predetermined game ball is started. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the period of time elapses after the gaming ball of No. 1 has passed a position where the ball can enter the predetermined entry portion.

According to the feature A8, when the predetermined period is set to the second period, one for the predetermined game ball that has entered the trigger ball entering means and generated the predetermined trigger and the predetermined game ball. It is possible to prevent both of the game balls in the previous firing order from entering the predetermined ball entry portion of the predetermined ball entry means which is in the first state with respect to the occurrence of the predetermined trigger by the predetermined game ball. Will be. As a result, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the predetermined entry portion or to make it difficult for the entry to occur.

Feature A9. When the predetermined period is set to the first period, the game ball enters the predetermined entry portion with a specific probability.
The specific probability is 1 / X (X is an integer greater than or equal to 1).
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein X game balls are given to the player when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion.

According to the feature A9, when the predetermined period is set to the first period, the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion at a rate of 1 in X, whereas the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion. When a ball enters, X game balls are given to the player, so if the predetermined period is set to the first period, the number of game balls owned by the player is substantially increased or decreased. It is possible to aim the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry portion while preventing the ball from entering.

Feature A10. It is provided with an opportunity entry means (through winning section 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
The predetermined trigger is generated based on the fact that the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means.
This game machine is
When the game ball enters the trigger entry means in a situation where the measurement for the predetermined period cannot be started, the information acquisition means (main side MPU 72) for acquiring the trigger information (holding information on the normal drawing side) (Function to execute the process of step S603) and
When it becomes possible to start the measurement for the predetermined period in the situation where the trigger information is acquired, the measurement means for starting the measurement for the predetermined period (execution of the normal map fluctuation start processing in the main MPU 72). Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that

According to the feature A10, since a predetermined trigger is generated based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entering means, the occurrence of the predetermined trigger becomes clear to the player. In addition, in a situation where the measurement for a predetermined period cannot be started, the trigger information is acquired when the game ball enters the trigger ball means, and the trigger information is acquired for the predetermined period. The measurement is newly started. This makes it possible to provide many opportunities for measurement during a predetermined period.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the second period is a period during which acquisition of the trigger information is prohibited or a period during which acquisition is difficult.

According to the feature A11, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, the trigger information is not acquired or is difficult to be acquired. As a result, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, the measurement of the predetermined period is started at the timing when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, so that the second period is set. In such a situation, it is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter a predetermined ball entry portion.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, wherein the first period is a period during which acquisition of the opportunity information is possible or a period during which acquisition is likely to occur.

According to the feature A12, when the first period is set as the predetermined period, the trigger information is acquired or easily acquired. As a result, when the first period is set as the predetermined period, the measurement of the predetermined period is likely to be started at a timing different from the timing when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, so that the first period is set. In the set situation, it is possible to irregularly generate a game ball into a predetermined ball entry section.

Feature A13. The second setting means is characterized in that the second period is set as the predetermined period when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not acquired. The gaming machine according to any one of A12.

According to the feature A13, when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in the situation where more than the predetermined number of trigger information is not acquired, the second period is set as the predetermined period, so that the second period is set. In such a situation, it becomes easy to design the predetermined ball entry means to be in the first state at a timing at which the game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry portion or is difficult to occur.

Feature A14. The feature A10 is characterized in that the first setting means sets the first period as the predetermined period when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is acquired. The gaming machine according to any one of A13.

According to the feature A14, when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in the situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is acquired, the first period is set as the predetermined period, so that the first period is set. A player who expects this will pay attention to whether or not a predetermined number or more of trigger information is acquired.

Feature A15. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the first period is a period during which acquisition of the trigger information is possible or a period during which acquisition is likely to occur.

According to the feature A15, when the first period is set as the predetermined period, the trigger information is acquired or easily acquired. As a result, once a predetermined number or more of trigger information is acquired, the situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period can be maintained by continuously inserting the game ball into the trigger ball means. It will be possible.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the predetermined number is a plurality of numbers.

According to the feature A16, since the first period is set as the predetermined period in the situation where a plurality of trigger information is acquired, the trigger information is accidentally acquired in the situation where the second period is set as the predetermined period. Even so, the first period is not set as a predetermined period after that. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the first period is set as a predetermined period to occur.

Feature A17. The first setting means sets the first period as the predetermined period when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is acquired.
The second setting means sets the second period as the predetermined period when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information has not been acquired.
The game machine has a third setting means (main side MPU 72) that sets the first period or a period during which the opportunity information can be acquired as the predetermined period in a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information has not been acquired. The gaming machine according to any one of features A10 to A16, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S805 in the above.

According to the feature A17, when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in the situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is acquired, the first period is set as the predetermined period, so that the first period is set. A player who expects this will pay attention to whether or not a predetermined number or more of trigger information is acquired. In addition, since the second period is set as the predetermined period when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in the situation where the trigger information of the predetermined number or more is not acquired, the predetermined period is set in the situation where the second period is set. It becomes easy to design the predetermined ball-entry means to be in the first state at the timing when it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball-entry portion.

In this case, even in a situation where more than a predetermined number of trigger information has not been acquired, a first period or a period during which the trigger information can be acquired can be set as a predetermined period. As a result, even if the second period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to cause a situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period thereafter. Further, it is possible to realize such an opportunity to switch the predetermined period by setting the predetermined period.

Feature A18. The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the predetermined period set by the third setting means is a period during which a larger number of trigger information than the predetermined number can be acquired.

According to the feature A18, when a predetermined period is set by the third setting means, it is possible to acquire a number of trigger information exceeding the predetermined number. As a result, when a predetermined period is set by the third setting means, it is possible to continue the situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period for a long time.

Feature A19. The first setting means holds a predetermined situation (in the first embodiment, a reference number or more of the reserved information on the normal drawing side is stored, and in the fourth embodiment, one or more reserved information on the normal drawing side is held. A memorized situation, in the sixth embodiment, a situation in which one or more third general figure side hold information is reserved and stored, or a situation in which the display continuation times are executed in the third general figure display unit 133, the ninth. In the embodiment, one or more reserved information on the third normal drawing side is held and stored, or one or more reserved information on the fourth normal drawing side is held and stored, and in the tenth embodiment, the second normal drawing is held. When the measurement of the predetermined period is started in the situation where one or more side hold information is held and stored), the first period is set as the predetermined period.
The second setting means has one of the features A1 to A18, which is characterized in that the second period is set as the predetermined period when the measurement of the predetermined period is started in a situation other than the predetermined situation. Described game machine.

According to the feature A19, the first period is selected as the predetermined period when the predetermined situation is met, and the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry portion or the entry is likely to occur. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the predetermined situation will be reached.

Feature A20. A specific ball-entry means (specific operating unit 124 in the fourth embodiment, first general electric device 121 in the tenth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A19, wherein the predetermined situation occurs based on the entry of a gaming ball into the specific entry means.

According to the feature A20, since the predetermined situation occurs based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, the player who expects that the first period is selected as the predetermined period plays the game in the specific ball entry means. By paying attention to whether or not the ball enters, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A21. The game machine according to feature A20, wherein the predetermined trigger does not occur even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature A21, since the player plays the game while expecting both the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity and the entry of the game ball into the specific entry means, the target to be noticed by the player is It will be diversified and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A22. It is a configuration in which measurement is performed for a specific period based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to feature A21, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation in which the measurement in the specific period is performed or a situation in which the measurement in the specific period is performed.

According to the feature A22, a predetermined situation occurs when the measurement for a specific period is performed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, and in the predetermined situation, the first period is set as the predetermined period. By setting, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter a predetermined ball entry portion, or the ball entry is likely to occur. In this case, the longer the specific period is continued, the longer the period in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry portion or the more likely the entry is to occur is likely to continue. Therefore, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention during a specific period, and it causes a situation in which the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry portion or the situation in which the entry is likely to occur continues for a long time. It becomes possible.

Feature A23. The gaming machine according to any one of features A19 to A22, wherein the predetermined situation occurs when a special gaming state (big hit state) advantageous to the player is reached.

According to the feature A23, not only when a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, but also by setting the first period as a predetermined period, it is possible to enter the game ball into the predetermined entry portion. Or the ball is likely to enter. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating a special gaming state.

Feature A24. A specific ball-entry means (first general electric device 121 in the tenth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state is provided.
The predetermined ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when the game ball is supplied to the game area so that the game ball flows down toward the specific ball entry means. Features The gaming machine according to A23.

According to the feature A24, in the case of a special gaming state, not only the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means, but also the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry portion. The ball is likely to enter. Further, in the special gaming state, by supplying the game ball to the game area in a predetermined mode, both the ball entry of the game ball into the specific entry means and the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means can be performed. It becomes possible to aim. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the special gaming state while suppressing the complexity of the gaming operation in the special gaming state.

Feature A25. The situation in which the first period is set by the first setting means as the predetermined period is characterized in that it can be terminated when a transition to a special gaming state (big hit state) advantageous to the player occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A24.

According to the feature A25, since the situation where the first period is set as the predetermined period can be terminated with the transition to the special gaming state, the situation where the first period is set as the predetermined period continues excessively. It is possible to prevent it.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features A1 to A25, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Motivation ball entry means (through winning section 34 in the first embodiment, specific operating section 124 in the fourth embodiment, first universal electric device in the tenth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. 121) and
Trigger information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means (in the first embodiment, the normal map side hold information, in the fourth embodiment, the third normal map side hold information, the tenth embodiment Then, the information acquisition means for acquiring the second normal drawing side holding information (the function of executing the process of step S603 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and the process of step S1303 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment). A function to execute, in the tenth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S2203 in the main MPU 72),
A predetermined profit is given to the player on the condition that the above-mentioned opportunity information is acquired (in the first embodiment, the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35, and in the fourth embodiment, the opening execution of the third general electric device 123). A fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S610 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a predetermined profit-giving means for giving the state, the open execution state of the second electric device 122 in the tenth embodiment). In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1310 in the main MPU 72, and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2213 in the main MPU 72).
A measuring means for measuring a predetermined period based on the acquisition of the trigger information (a function of executing the processes of steps S607 to S609 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a main side in the fourth embodiment). A function of executing the processes of steps S1307 to S1309 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the processes of steps S221 to S2212 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment), and
Information storage that stores the trigger information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the trigger entry means at least in a situation where the measurement means is measuring for the predetermined period. Means (in the first embodiment, the normal figure holding area 116, in the fourth embodiment, the third normal figure holding area 143, in the tenth embodiment, the second normal figure holding area 142),
With
The measuring means starts the measurement of the predetermined period when it becomes possible to start the measurement of the predetermined period in the situation where the trigger information is acquired.
The game machine enables a player to be given a specific profit (winning to the special winning device 35) in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, or a predetermined number or more. In the situation where the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, a specific profit (winning to the special winning device 35) is more than in the situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. Specific profit-giving means (a function of executing the process of step S806 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1008 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, a third In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1605 in the main MPU 72, in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1705 in the main MPU 72, and in the ninth embodiment, the function of step S2006 in the main MPU 72. A gaming machine having a function of executing processing, and in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2503 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature B1, a predetermined profit is given to the player on the condition that the trigger information is acquired based on the game ball entering the trigger entry means and the trigger information is acquired at least one condition. Therefore, the player expects the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. In this case, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, a specific profit can be given or is likely to be given. As a result, not only a predetermined profit but also a specific profit can be given based on the game ball being inserted into the triggering ball means, so that the advantage of inserting the game ball into the triggering ball means is advantageous. It becomes possible to increase. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. The situation in which the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means is higher in the information storage means than the situation in which the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the trigger information can be easily stored.

According to the feature B2, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, not only the specific profit can be given or is easily given, but also the trigger information is easily stored in the information storage means. .. As a result, once a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the situation can be easily continued, so that the advantage of storing the predetermined number or more of the trigger information in the information storage means is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature B3. The situation in which the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means is longer as the predetermined period than the situation in which the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein is made to be selected or is easily selected.

According to feature B3, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, a long period is selected as a predetermined period or is easily selected, so that a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information. In the situation stored in the means, not only the specific benefit can be given or is easily given, but also the opportunity information is easily stored in the information storage means. As a result, once a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the situation can be easily continued, so that the advantage of storing the predetermined number or more of the trigger information in the information storage means is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature B4. In a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the trigger ball means before the situation becomes possible to perform a new measurement of the predetermined period as the predetermined period. It is a configuration set in the first period that allows the game ball to enter the ball or makes it easy for the ball to enter.
This game machine is
In a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not stored in the information storage means, the trigger ball means before the situation becomes possible to perform a new measurement of the predetermined period as the predetermined period. A second setting means (a function of executing the process of step S804 in the main MPU 72) for setting a second period for disabling the entry of the game ball into or making it difficult for the entry to occur, and
In a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information has not been acquired, the third setting means (step S805 in the main MPU 72) for setting the first period or the period during which the trigger information can be acquired as the predetermined period. Function to execute the processing of) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that

According to feature B4, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, a first period is set as a predetermined period, and a predetermined number or more of trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. By setting the second period as a predetermined period in the above, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, not only a specific benefit can be given or is easily given, but also information storage. Trigger information can be easily stored in the means. As a result, once a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the situation can be easily continued, so that the advantage of storing the predetermined number or more of the trigger information in the information storage means is increased. It becomes possible. In this case, even in a situation where more than a predetermined number of trigger information has not been acquired, a first period or a period during which the trigger information can be acquired can be set as a predetermined period. As a result, even if the second period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to cause a situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period thereafter. Further, it is possible to realize such an opportunity to switch the predetermined period by setting the predetermined period.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined period set by the third setting means is a period during which a larger number of trigger information than the predetermined number can be acquired.

According to the feature B5, when the predetermined period is set by the third setting means, it is possible to store the number of trigger information exceeding the predetermined number in the information storage means. As a result, when a predetermined period is set by the third setting means, it is possible to continue the situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period for a long time.

Feature B6. The specific profit-giving means causes a situation in which a game ball can be entered into a predetermined ball-entry means (special winning device 35) as a grant of the specific profit.
The game machine is a means for shifting the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (in the first embodiment, in the main MPU 72). Any of features B1 to B5, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S311 and, in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1114 and S1115 in the main MPU 72). The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature B6, when a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. It shifts to the special game state based on. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the special gaming state expects that a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B7. A separate ball entry means (first operating unit 32) capable of entering a game ball regardless of whether or not the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means is provided.
Means for shifting the game state to the special game state on the condition that the game ball has entered the separate ball entry means (in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S308 to S311 in the main MPU 72 are executed. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that it has a function of performing, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1114 and S1115 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature B7, the transition to the special game state may occur even when the game ball enters the separate ball entry means, but further when the information storage means stores more than a predetermined number of trigger information. The transition to the special gaming state may occur based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the special gaming state expects not only the game ball to enter the separate ball entry means but also the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible to improve the interests of.

Feature B8. The trigger ball entry means, the predetermined ball entry means, and the separate ball entry means are provided at positions that can be reached when the game ball is supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to feature B7.

According to the feature B8, by making the game ball supplied to the game area in a predetermined mode, the game ball is aimed at each of the trigger ball entry means, the predetermined ball entry means, and the separate ball entry means. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complexity of the game operation.

Feature B9. In the special gaming state, a profit can be given to the player by supplying the gaming ball to the gaming area in a specific manner.
The game machine according to any one of features B6 to B8, wherein when the game ball is supplied in the specific embodiment, the game ball does not or is unlikely to enter the trigger ball entry means. ..

According to the feature B9, the game ball does not enter the triggering ball means based on the transition to the special gaming state, and the game ball does not enter the triggering ball means. The situation is such that more than a predetermined number of trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to end the situation in which the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means with the transition to the special game state.

Feature B10. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that the game ball can be entered into the trigger ball entry means when a special game state advantageous to the player is reached.

According to the feature B10, since it is possible to enter the game ball into the trigger ball entry means in the special game state, a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, and the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored. Is stored in the information storage means, so that a specific profit can be given or a specific profit can be easily given. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the transition to the special gaming state.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features B1 to B10, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. An opportunity ball entry means (specific operating unit 124) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and
Execution of the information acquisition means (process of step S1303 in the main MPU 72) for acquiring the trigger information (third normal drawing side hold information in the fourth embodiment) based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means. Function to do) and
A predetermined profit-giving means (step in the main MPU 72) that grants a predetermined profit (open execution state of the third universal device 123 in the fourth embodiment) to the player on the condition that the trigger information is acquired. Function to execute the processing of S1310) and
A measuring means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1307 to S1309 in the main MPU 72) for measuring a predetermined period based on the acquisition of the trigger information, and
The specific profit (winning to the special winning device 35) can be given to the player in the situation where the predetermined period is measured, or the predetermined period is measured in the situation where the predetermined period is measured. A function of executing the process of step S1605 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, which makes it easier for the player to be given the specific profit (winning to the special winning device 35) than in the absence situation. A gaming machine comprising: a function of executing the process of step S1705 in the main MPU 72 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2006 in the main MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment).

According to the feature C1, a predetermined profit is given to the player on the condition that the trigger information is acquired based on the game ball entering the trigger entry means and the trigger information is acquired at least one condition. Therefore, the player expects the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. In this case, a specific profit can be given or is likely to be given in a situation where a predetermined period is measured. As a result, not only a predetermined profit but also a specific profit can be given based on the game ball being inserted into the triggering ball means, so that the advantage of inserting the game ball into the triggering ball means is advantageous. It becomes possible to increase. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The specific profit-giving means causes a situation in which a game ball can be entered into a predetermined ball-entry means (special winning device 35) as a grant of the specific profit.
The game machine is a means for shifting the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (in the first embodiment, in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it includes a function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S311 and, in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1114 and S1115 in the main MPU 72). ..

According to the feature C2, it is possible to enter the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means when the predetermined period is measured, and the special game is based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. Move to the state. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the special gaming state is expected to perform the measurement for a predetermined period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C3. A separate ball-entry means (first operating unit 32) capable of entering a game ball regardless of whether or not the predetermined period has been measured is provided.
Means for shifting the game state to the special game state on the condition that the game ball has entered the separate ball entry means (in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S308 to S311 in the main MPU 72 are executed. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that it has a function of performing, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1114 and S1115 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature C3, even if the game ball enters the separate entry means, the transition to the special gaming state may occur, but in the situation where the predetermined period is measured, the game to the predetermined entry means is further performed. A transition to a special gaming state may occur based on the entry of the ball. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the special gaming state expects not only the game ball to enter the separate ball entry means but also the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible to improve the interests of.

Feature C4. The trigger ball entry means, the predetermined ball entry means, and the separate ball entry means are provided at positions that can be reached when the game ball is supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner. Feature The gaming machine described in C3.

According to the feature C4, by making the game ball supplied to the game area in a predetermined mode, the game ball is aimed at each of the trigger ball entry means, the predetermined ball entry means, and the separate ball entry means. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complexity of the game operation.

Feature C5. In the special gaming state, a profit can be given to the player by supplying the gaming ball to the gaming area in a specific manner.
The game machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, wherein when the game ball is supplied in the specific embodiment, the game ball does not or is unlikely to enter the trigger ball entry means. ..

According to the feature C5, the game ball does not enter the triggering ball means based on the transition to the special gaming state, and the game ball does not enter the triggering ball means. The situation is such that the predetermined period has not been measured. Therefore, it is possible to end the situation in which the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means with the transition to the special game state.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, wherein the measuring means continues the measurement for the predetermined period even in the special gaming state.

According to the feature C6, the measurement for a predetermined period is completed in the situation where the special gaming state is being executed. As a result, it is possible to end the situation in which the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means with the transition to the special game state as an opportunity.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the predetermined period is shorter than the shortest period required to digest the special gaming state.

According to the feature C7, when the transition to the special gaming state occurs, it is possible to ensure that the measurement for a predetermined period is completed by the end of the special gaming state.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features C1 to C7, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Specific entry means (first general electric device 121 in the tenth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Specific control means (main side MPU72) that enables the game ball to enter or facilitates entry into the specific entry means when a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player is reached. (Function of executing the processes of steps S2114 and S2115) in
A predetermined ball-entry means (special winning device 35) that enables or facilitates the entry of a game ball flowing down the game area in the special game state.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, in the case of a special gaming state, not only the game ball can be entered or easily entered into the specific entry means, but also the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry means. It becomes easier to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage in the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific ball entry means, the special ball entry means (second in the tenth embodiment) that enables or facilitates the entry of the game ball flowing down the game area. Equipped with a general electric device 122)
The game machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the game ball can or easily enters the predetermined ball entry means based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature D2, when the game shifts to the special game state, the game ball can or easily enters the specific ball entry means. Then, when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the game ball can enter or is easily entered in both the special entry means and the predetermined entry means. This not only makes it possible to increase the advantage in the special gaming state, but also makes it possible to diversify the target ball-entry means that can or easily enter the ball in the special gaming state.

Feature D3. By supplying the game ball to the game area in a specific mode, the game ball can reach a position where the ball can enter the specific ball entry means.
The predetermined ball entry means is provided on the downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the specific ball entry means.
When a game ball is supplied to the game area in the specific embodiment, the game ball that has not entered the specific entry means can reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined entry means. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, a game ball that did not enter the specific entry means in the special gaming state can enter the predetermined entry means. This makes it possible to reduce the number of game balls that are wasted in the special game state.

Feature D4. An opportunity entry means (through winning section 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Even if a game ball enters the trigger entry means in a situation other than the special gaming state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined entry means, and the special gaming state is reached. In the predetermined control means (step S2501 in the main MPU 72), which enables or facilitates the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the opportunity entry means. (Function to execute the process of step S2503) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that

According to the feature D4, the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry means or can be easily entered based on the game ball entering the opportunity entry means. Therefore, the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry means. It is possible to make the process for entering the ball stepwise. In this case, in a situation where the game is not in the special game state, even if the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the situation is in the special game state. When the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, the game ball can or easily enter the predetermined ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which a game ball can or is likely to enter a predetermined ball-entry means only in a special gaming state.

Feature D5. The predetermined ball entry means is a first state (acceptance state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion (discharge passage 42) or is likely to occur, and a game in the predetermined ball entry portion. It is provided so that it can be switched to the second state (non-accepting state) where it is impossible for the ball to enter or it is difficult for the ball to enter.
The game machine is provided with a measuring means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2404 to S2406 in the main MPU 72) for measuring a predetermined period based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entering means.
The predetermined control means puts the predetermined ball entry means into the first state after the measurement of the predetermined period by the measuring means is completed.
This game machine is
In the special gaming state, the predetermined ball is flowing down the game area in a predetermined mode for the predetermined period, and the predetermined ball is in the first state. First setting means (main side in the tenth embodiment) for setting a first period (third display continuation period) that enables or facilitates the arrival of the game ball at a position where the ball can enter the means. (Function to execute the process of step S2503 in MPU72) and
In the case where the game ball is not in the special gaming state, the game ball is flowing down the game area in the predetermined mode for the predetermined period, and the predetermined entry means is in the first state. A second setting means (mainly in the tenth embodiment) for setting a second period (first display continuation period) that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to reach a position where the ball means can enter the ball means. (Function to execute the process of step S2502 in the side MPU 72) and
The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that

According to the feature D5, when a predetermined period elapses after the game ball enters the trigger entry means, the predetermined entry means is in the first state, so that the predetermined entry means is in the first state. It is possible to predict in advance. In this case, when the first period is set as the predetermined period, the game ball can be entered into the predetermined entry portion or the entry is likely to occur, whereas the predetermined period is set. When the second period is set, it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry portion, or the ball entry becomes difficult to occur. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above only by adjusting the predetermined period.

Feature D6. The predetermined control means sets the predetermined ball entry means in the same manner as the first state regardless of whether the first period is set as the predetermined period or the second period is set. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is characterized in that it does.

According to the feature D6, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while simplifying the control of switching the predetermined ball entry means between the first state and the second state.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, wherein the second period is shorter than the first period.

According to the feature D7, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, the game ball cannot enter the predetermined entry portion or the second period is relative in the configuration in which the entry is difficult to occur. By setting the period for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being unable to enter the predetermined ball entry section or the situation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball to continue excessively. Will be.

Feature D8. The first period is equal to or longer than the shortest supply cycle of the game ball to the game area, and the second period is shorter than the shortest supply cycle. The first aspect is described in any one of features D5 to D7. A game machine.

According to the feature D8, in a situation where the first period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to expect that one or more game balls are supplied to the positions of the predetermined ball entry means and the like, while the predetermined period is set. In a situation where a second period is set as the period, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being wasted.

Feature D9. The trigger ball entry means is provided on the upstream side of the game ball in the flow direction of the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means can enter the predetermined ball entry portion. It is a configuration that can reach
The second period is a period shorter than the shortest period required for the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means to reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined entry portion. D5 The gaming machine according to any one of D8.

According to the feature D9, the trigger ball entry means is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means can reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion. With the configuration, it is possible to generate both the entry of the trigger entry means and the entry into the predetermined entry portion by one game ball. In this case, the second period is a period shorter than the shortest period required for the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means to reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined entry portion. As a result, when the predetermined period is set to the second period, the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means and started the measurement of the predetermined period can be prevented from entering the predetermined ball entry portion. It will be possible.

Feature D10. In the second period, when the measurement in the second period is started when a predetermined game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, the firing order one before the predetermined game ball is started. The game machine according to feature D9, wherein the game ball is a period of time that elapses after passing a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion.

According to the feature D10, when the predetermined period is set to the second period, one for the predetermined game ball that has entered the trigger ball entering means and generated the predetermined trigger and the predetermined game ball. It is possible to prevent both of the game balls in the previous firing order from entering the predetermined ball entry portion of the predetermined ball entry means which is in the first state with respect to the occurrence of the predetermined trigger by the predetermined game ball. Will be. As a result, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the predetermined entry portion or to make it difficult for the entry to occur.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D10, any one of the features A1 to A25, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. The first ball entry means (first electric device 121) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
After the first predetermined opportunity occurs, the first control means (main side in the fourth embodiment) that generates the first predetermined state in which the game ball can or easily enters the first ball entry means. A function of executing the processes of steps S1114 and S1115 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the processes of steps S2114 and S2115 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment), and
A second ball entry means (second general electric device 122) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
After the second predetermined opportunity occurs, the second control means (main side in the fourth embodiment) generates a second predetermined state in which the game ball can or easily enters the second ball entry means. A function of executing the processes of steps S1213 and S1214 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the processes of steps S2213 and S2214 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment), and
A third ball-entry means (third electric device 123 in the fourth embodiment, special winning device 35 in the tenth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
After the occurrence of the third predetermined opportunity, the third control means (main side in the fourth embodiment) that generates a third predetermined state in which the game ball can or easily enters the third ball entry means. A function of executing the process of step S1310 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2407 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment), and
Even if the second predetermined trigger occurs, the second predetermined state is prevented from occurring in the situation where the first predetermined state occurs, while the first predetermined state occurs even in the situation where the first predetermined state occurs. Special execution means for enabling the third predetermined state to occur (a function of executing the processes of steps S1204 and S1215 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2204 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment). And the function to execute the process of step S2215),
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the provision of the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means, and the third ball entry means diversifies the targets to which the player expects the game ball to enter. In this case, even if the second predetermined trigger occurs, the second predetermined state of the second ball entry means is prevented from occurring in the situation where the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means occurs, while the second predetermined state is prevented. 1 A third predetermined state can occur even in a situation where a predetermined state has occurred. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of occurrence of the game ball in a configuration provided with a plurality of ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. The game according to feature E1, wherein the special executing means prevents the first predetermined state from occurring in a situation where the second predetermined state occurs even if the first predetermined trigger occurs. Machine.

According to the feature E2, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means and the second predetermined state of the second ball entry means from overlapping each other. As a result, even if both the condition for generating the first predetermined state and the condition for generating the second predetermined state are satisfied, the player can enter the game ball into the first ball entry means and play the game into the second ball entry means. It is possible to aim at the entry of the ball step by step.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the special executing means enables the first predetermined state to occur even in a situation where the third predetermined state has occurred.

According to the feature E3, the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means and the third predetermined state of the third ball entry means may occur in an overlapping manner. As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of the other situation in one of the situations where the first ball entry means is in the first predetermined state and the third ball entry means is in the third predetermined state. ..

Feature E4. The second predetermined trigger occurs based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the third predetermined trigger does not occur even if the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

According to the feature E4, in the configuration in which the second ball entry means is in the second predetermined state based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, even if the second predetermined opportunity occurs, the first ball entry means. The second predetermined state of the second ball entry means does not occur in the situation where the first predetermined state of the means occurs. As a result, the player can gradually aim at the entry of the game ball into the first entry means and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the third predetermined state of the third ball entry means occurs regardless of the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means occurs. In the situation, a third predetermined state of the third ball entry means occurs. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which it is possible to simultaneously aim the entry of the game ball into the first entry means and the entry of the game ball into the third entry means.

Feature E5. The third predetermined opportunity is a configuration that does not occur even if a game ball enters the second ball entry means.
The special executing means enables the first predetermined state to occur even in a situation where the third predetermined state is occurring, and the first predetermined state even in a situation where the second predetermined state is occurring. 3. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that a predetermined state can be generated and the second predetermined state can be generated even in a situation where the third predetermined state is occurring.

According to the feature E5, in a configuration in which the third ball entry means is in the third predetermined state regardless of the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the third ball entry means 3 The predetermined state may occur in duplicate with both the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means and the second predetermined state of the second ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the arbitrariness of the timing at which the third ball entry means becomes the third predetermined state.

Feature E6. The third ball entry means is provided at a position where the ball can enter when the game ball is supplied to the game area so that the game ball flows down toward the first ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5.

According to the feature E6, in a configuration in which the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means and the third predetermined state of the third ball entry means can occur in an overlapping manner, the supply of the game ball to the game area is a predetermined mode. By doing so, it is possible to aim at both the entry of the game ball into the first entry means and the entry of the game ball into the third entry means.

Feature E7. When the special executing means prevents the second predetermined state from occurring in the situation where the first predetermined state occurs even if the second predetermined trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the second predetermined state occurs. , A means for causing the second predetermined state to start after the first predetermined state ends (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1205 and S1206 in the main MPU 72, tenth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the main MPU 72 includes a function of executing the processes of steps S2205 and S2206).

According to the feature E7, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the second predetermined trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the second predetermined state from being invalidated by the occurrence of the first predetermined state.

Feature E8. The second control means puts the second ball entry means into the second predetermined state after the lapse of the second predetermined period based on the occurrence of the second predetermined opportunity.
When the first predetermined state occurs in the middle of the second predetermined period, the special executing means stops the measurement of the second predetermined period or extends the second predetermined period to obtain the second predetermined state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that the second predetermined state does not occur in a situation where the first predetermined state occurs even if an opportunity occurs.

According to the feature E8, the second predetermined state of the second ball entry means is prevented from occurring in the situation where the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means is generated only by adjusting the second predetermined period. Is possible.

Feature E9. When the first predetermined state occurs in a situation where the second predetermined period is being measured and the measurement of the second predetermined period is stopped, the special executing means is after the first predetermined state is completed. Means for resuming the stopped measurement for the second predetermined period (a function of executing the processes of steps S1205 and S1206 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2205 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature E8, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2206).

According to the feature E9, the second predetermined state of the second ball entry means is generated in the situation where the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means is generated only by temporarily stopping and canceling the measurement in the second predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the state from occurring.

Feature E10. Although the third predetermined opportunity does not occur even if the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the game is played in the third ball entry means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the ball can be entered or the ball is likely to be entered.

According to the feature E10, even if the first ball entering means does not contribute to the occurrence of the third predetermined opportunity, the ease of entering the game ball into the third ball entering means is defined as the first ball entering means. It becomes possible to associate.

Feature E11. The first ball entry means (first electric device 121) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Based on the occurrence of the first predetermined opportunity, after the lapse of the first predetermined period, a first predetermined state is generated in which the game ball can or easily enters the first ball entry means. 1 control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1114 and S1115 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2114 and S2115 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment).
A second ball entry means (second general electric device 122) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Based on the occurrence of the second predetermined opportunity, after the second predetermined period has elapsed, a second predetermined state is generated in which the game ball can or is easily entered into the second entry means. With the second control means (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1213 and S1214 in the main MPU 72, and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2213 and S2214 in the main MPU 72). ,
A third ball-entry means (third electric device 123 in the fourth embodiment, special winning device 35 in the tenth embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Based on the occurrence of the third predetermined opportunity, after the lapse of the third predetermined period, a third predetermined state is generated in which the game ball can enter or is easily entered into the third entry means. A third control means (a function of executing the process of step S1310 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2407 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment).
When the first predetermined state occurs in the middle of the second predetermined period, the measurement of the second predetermined period is stopped or the second predetermined period is extended, while the first predetermined state is in the middle of the third predetermined period. A special execution means that does not change the third predetermined period even if a predetermined state occurs (a function of executing the processes of steps S1204 and S1215 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and a main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment). (Function to execute the processing of step S2204 and step S2215) in
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E11, the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means, and the third ball entry means all have the corresponding predetermined states after the corresponding predetermined period elapses when the corresponding predetermined trigger occurs. This makes it possible for the game ball to enter or makes it easier for the game ball to enter. This makes it possible to predict in advance that each ball entry means will be in the corresponding predetermined state.

In this case, if the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means occurs in the middle of the second predetermined period, the measurement of the second predetermined period is stopped or the second predetermined period is extended, while the second 3 Even if the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means occurs in the situation where the predetermined period is being measured, the measurement of the third predetermined period is not stopped. As a result, the second ball entry means is prevented from being in the second predetermined state in the situation where the first ball entry means is in the first predetermined state, while the first ball entry means is in the first predetermined state. It is possible to allow the third ball entry means to be in the third predetermined state in such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the mode of occurrence of the game ball in a configuration provided with a plurality of ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features E1 to E11, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines are configured to give a profit to a player by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special control state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that the pachinko machine shifts to the special control state based on the ball entering the unit. Then, when the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. The first specific ball entry means (fourth electric device 161) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Based on the occurrence of the first specific opportunity, after the lapse of the first specific period, a first specific state is generated in which the game ball can or easily enters the first specific ball entry means. The first specific control means (the function of executing the processes of steps S2910 and S2911 in the main MPU 72) and
When a predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, and the first Event response means (function to execute adjustment processing in the main MPU 72) that makes the treatment of the first specific period different depending on whether it does not correspond to the occurrence of a specific state, and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, when the first specific opportunity occurs, the first specific ball entry means is put into the first specific state after the first specific period has elapsed. As a result, the player can predict in advance that the first specific ball entry means will be in the first specific state.

In this case, when a predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, and the first The treatment of the first specific period differs depending on whether or not the occurrence of the specific state is supported. As a result, a predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period while handling the first specific period in a mode suitable for each of the case where the condition for generating the first specific state is satisfied and the case where the condition is not satisfied. When it occurs, it is possible to change the progress mode of the first specific period in accordance with the occurrence of a predetermined event.

Feature F2. When the predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, the event response means responds to the occurrence of the first specific state by the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period. If not, the first specific period is terminated, while the first specific opportunity that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the timing of occurrence of the first specific state is changed.

According to the feature F2, when a predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state. Ends the first specific period. As a result, the first specific period that does not lead to the occurrence of the first specific state can be terminated by the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the digestion efficiency of the first specific period can be improved while giving priority to the predetermined event. On the other hand, when the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, the occurrence timing of the first specific state is changed. As a result, it is possible to shorten or extend the progress mode of the first specific period in response to the occurrence of a predetermined event, while preventing the benefit of the occurrence of the first specific state from disappearing.

Feature F3. When the predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, the event response means responds to the occurrence of the first specific state by the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period. If not, the first specific period is terminated, while the first specific opportunity that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the occurrence timing of the first specific state is delayed.

According to the feature F3, when a predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state. Ends the first specific period. As a result, the first specific period that does not lead to the occurrence of the first specific state can be terminated by the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the digestion efficiency of the first specific period can be improved while giving priority to the predetermined event. On the other hand, when the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, the occurrence timing of the first specific state is delayed. As a result, it is possible to give priority to a predetermined event and prevent the benefit of the occurrence of the first specific state from being lost.

Feature F4. When the predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the first specific state, the event response means measures the first specific period. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the timing of occurrence of the first specific state is delayed by temporarily stopping the measurement and then resuming the measurement in the first specific period.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effect only by temporarily stopping and canceling the measurement in the first specific period.

Feature F5. The first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the first specific state is the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger not corresponding to the occurrence of the first specific state. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, which is characterized by being shorter than.

According to the feature F5, it is possible to shorten the period required from the occurrence of the first specific opportunity to the start of the first specific state. In this case, since the first specific period having the configuration of the above feature F3 and triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state is terminated when a predetermined event occurs, the first specific period It is possible to increase the digestive efficiency of.

Feature F6. In the special game state, a predetermined profit can be given based on the game ball being supplied to the game area in a predetermined mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the first specific trigger can occur when a gaming ball is supplied to the gaming area in the predetermined mode.

According to the feature F6, not only a predetermined benefit is given by supplying the game ball to the game area in a predetermined mode in the special game state, but also the first specific ball entry means can be in the first specific state. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the special gaming state.

Feature F7. An entry provided in a position where the game ball can be entered or a position where the game ball is likely to enter based on the supply of the game ball in a specific aspect different from the predetermined aspect to the game area. The processing of steps S2614 and S2615 in the main MPU 72 is executed on the condition that the game ball has entered the ball means (first through winning unit 160) as at least one condition, and the game state is shifted to the special game state. Function to do)
The first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state is the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the first specific state. The gaming machine according to feature F6, which is characterized by being longer than.

According to the feature F7, the game ball is supplied to the game area in a specific manner with the aim of allowing the game ball to enter the ball entry means until the state shifts to the special game state, and the state shifts to the special game state. After that, the game ball is supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner so that a predetermined profit is given.

However, it is assumed that the game operation is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner in a situation where the game has not shifted to the special game state. In this case, although the game is not in the special game state. There is a risk that the first specific ball entry means will be in the first specific state. On the other hand, the first specific period triggered by the first specific state that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state is from the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the first specific state. Even if the game ball is supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner in order to bring the first specific ball entry means into the first specific state even though it is not in the special game state, the game efficiency is improved. It is possible to make it lower. On the other hand, in the special gaming state, the first specific period, which has the configuration of the above feature F3 and is triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state, ends when a predetermined event occurs. It is possible to improve the game efficiency.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the predetermined event occurs in the special gaming state.

According to the feature F8, a predetermined event occurs in the special gaming state, and when the predetermined event occurs, the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state ends. Even if the first specific period is set to a relatively long period, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the first specific period.

Feature F9. The feature F8 characterized in that the shortest occurrence interval of the predetermined event in the special gaming state is shorter than the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state. Described game machine.

According to the feature F9, since the predetermined event occurs at a relatively short interval in the special gaming state, the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state is set early. It can be terminated.

Feature F10. A means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the main MPU 72) that makes it possible to increase the advantage of the special gaming state based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F9, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature F10, not only a predetermined profit is given in the special game state, but also the player expects the game ball to enter the first specific ball entry means, so that the game It is possible to improve the interest.

Features F11. A second specific ball-entry means (second general-purpose device 122 or third general-purpose device 123 in the eleventh embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Based on the occurrence of the second specific opportunity, the second specific control means (main side MPU72) that generates a second specific state in which the game ball can or easily enters the second specific ball entry means. (Function to execute the process of step S2713 to step S2714 or step S2813 to step S2814) in
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the predetermined event is that the second specific ball entering means is in the second specific state.

According to the feature F11, it is possible to prevent the first specific ball entry means from being in the first specific state in the situation where the second specific ball entry means is in the second specific state. Then, while using this configuration, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as already described.

Feature F12. A third specific ball-entry means (second general electric device 122 in the eleventh embodiment) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Based on the occurrence of the third specific opportunity, after the lapse of the third specific period, a third specific state is generated in which the game ball can or easily enters the third specific ball entry means. A third specific control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2713 to S2714 in the main MPU 72) and
When the predetermined event occurs in the middle of the third specific period, means for temporarily stopping the measurement in the third specific period and then restarting the measurement in the third specific period (steps S2705-step in the main MPU 72). (Function to execute the processing of S2706 and step S2715) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11, characterized in that

According to the feature F12, it is possible to prevent the third specific period from being terminated even if a predetermined event occurs.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F12, any one of the features A1 to A25, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C7, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines are configured to give a profit to a player by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special control state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that the pachinko machine shifts to the special control state based on the ball entering the unit. Then, when the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, a novel game content is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A variable ball entry means (predetermined general electric device 172) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state,
Of the opening / closing control means (step S3507, step S3605, step S3610 and step S3710 in the main MPU 72) that executes the opening / closing control of the variable ball entering means in the open state and then in the closed state when the predetermined gaming state is reached. Function to execute processing) and
Execution of the first termination means (processes S3613 to S3615 in the main MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined gaming state after the number of times the variable ball entering means is opened in the predetermined gaming state reaches the upper limit. Function to do) and
A second end means (step S3605 to step S3608 and step S3705 in the main MPU 72) for ending the predetermined game state after the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined game state. (Function to execute the process of step S3707) and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the upper limit number of times is larger than the upper limit number.

According to the feature G1, the predetermined game state ends after the number of times the variable ball-entry means is opened reaches the upper limit, and the number of game balls entered into the variable ball-entry means becomes the upper limit. In the configuration in which the predetermined gaming state ends later, the maximum number of times is larger than the maximum number. As a result, even if one or more game balls are not inserted into the variable entry means in each execution time in the open state of the variable entry means, the maximum number of game balls can be used as the variable entry means in the predetermined gaming state. It is possible to enter the ball. In this case, in the predetermined gaming state, the player predicts whether or not the upper limit number of game balls will enter the variable entry means while paying attention to the number of times the variable entry means is opened. It will be possible to improve the interest of.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the period from the opening state of the variable ball entering means to the closing state is equal to or less than the shortest supply cycle of the game ball to the game area. ..

According to the feature G2, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in one open state execution time in the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls is about one, and the execution times in which the ball does not enter may occur. .. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature G1 is provided and the upper limit number of times is larger than the upper limit number, the player can enter the upper limit number of game balls into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state. Whether or not to do so is predicted while paying attention to the number of times the variable ball entry means is opened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G3. Predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize the number of occurrences of the open state required to reach the upper limit number and the number of game balls entered into the variable entry means required to reach the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the means for executing the above-mentioned means (function of executing the processing of step S3802, step S3804 and step S3811 in the sound light side MPU 92) is provided.

According to the feature G3, it is possible to grasp the remaining number of occurrences of the open state of the variable ball entry means and the remaining number of game balls that can be entered into the variable ball entry means by checking the predetermined notification. Become. As a result, the player can digest the predetermined game state while being aware of the situation in which the game ball should be inserted into the variable ball entry means and the situation in which the game ball does not have to be inserted.

Feature G4. The configuration is such that an extraordinary benefit can be given based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the game ball enters the variable ball entry means before the completion condition is satisfied. In the case of a new occurrence, the advantage of the extraordinary benefit is lower than in the case where the game ball is newly entered into the variable entry means after the completion condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3.

According to the feature G4, when the game ball is put into the variable ball entry means, if the game ball is put into the variable ball entry means again before the completion condition is satisfied, the advantage of the extraordinary profit is lowered. Resulting in. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature G1 is provided and the upper limit number of times is larger than the upper limit number, the completion condition is set while finally generating the upper limit number of game balls. In the situation where it is not established, it is possible to choose not to let the game ball enter the variable ball entry means that has been opened.

Feature G5. The variable ball entry means is provided with an accompanying ball entry means (first non-electric device 173) that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means and closed based on the entry of the game ball into itself. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4.

According to the feature G5, the accompanying ball entering means is opened based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the accompanying ball entering the ball is based on the game ball entering the accompanying ball entering means. In a configuration in which the means is closed, if a game ball enters the variable entry means in a situation where the accompanying entry means is open, the opportunity to enter the accompanying entry means is 1 You will lose the batch. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature G1 is provided and the upper limit number of times is larger than the upper limit number, the number of accompanying balls is finally generated while the upper limit number of game balls is entered. In a situation where the means is in the open state, it is possible to select not to let the game ball enter the variable ball entry means in the open state.

Feature G6. Allows the player to recognize the period required from the end of one execution round in which the variable ball-entry means is in the open state in the predetermined game state to the next time the variable ball-entry means is in the open state. The gaming machine according to feature G4 or G5, characterized in that it includes means for executing specific notification (a function of executing the processes of steps S3806 to S3809 in the sound light side MPU 92).

According to the feature G6, it is possible to grasp the timing when the variable ball entry means is next opened in the open state by confirming the specific notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down toward the variable ball entry means in advance when the situation is not such that the game ball should be inserted into the variable ball entry means.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features G1 to G6, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines are configured to give a profit to a player by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration in which a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area and a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery to shift to a special control state, or a predetermined entry ball It is known that the pachinko machine shifts to the special control state based on the ball entering the unit. Then, when the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... 1st operating part, 34 ... Through winning part, 35 ... Special winning device, 42 ... Discharge passage, 72 ... Main side MPU, 92 ... Sound light side MPU, 116 ... General drawing reservation area, 121 ... 1st general electric device, 122 ... 2nd general electric device, 123 ... 3rd general electric device, 124 ... specific operating unit, 142 ... 2nd general drawing holding area, 143 ... 3rd general drawing holding area, 160 ... No. 1-through winning section, 161 ... 4th general electric device, 172 ... predetermined general electric device, 173 ... 1st non-electric device.

Claims (1)

An opportunity ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring trigger information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means,
A predetermined profit-giving means for giving a predetermined profit to a player on the condition that the above-mentioned opportunity information is acquired, and
A measuring means that measures a predetermined period based on the acquisition of the trigger information,
The specific profit can be given to the player in the situation where the predetermined period is measured, or the specific profit is more than the situation where the predetermined period is not measured in the situation where the predetermined period is measured. A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for giving a specific profit that makes it easy to be given to.

Images